Syntagma Grammaticum , or an easy and methodical explanation of Lily’s Grammar , whereby the mystery of this art is more plainly set forth both for the better help of all schoolmasters in the true order of teaching, and the scholars far more easy attainment of the Latin tongue

Document TypeModernised
CodeGranger
PrinterThomas Dawson
Typeprint
Year1616
PlaceLondon
Other editions:
  • semi-diplomatic

Syntagma Grammaticum, or an easy and methodical explanation of Lily’s Grammar, whereby the mystery of this art is more plainly set forth both for the better help of all schoolmasters in the true order of teaching, and the scholars far more easy attainment of the Latin tongue.

 

By Thomas Granger Master of Arts. Peterhouse College, Cantabrigia.

 

Scientiarum ianitrix grammatica.

 

LONDON

Printed by Thomas Dawson.

1616.

{n. p.}

 

Ornatissimo viro, bonis omnibus et literatis amicissimo, ac maecenati meo benignissimo, Iohanni Leventhorpe equiti aurato perpetuam faelicitatem.

Cogitanti mihi tantillum (vir magnanime) cui primitias agri mei utcumque frugiferi sincero corde, non blandulis manibus offerrem, derepente tu occurrebas eo munere dignissimus. Primum, quia ut ipse non solum es genio, et ingenio singulari, sed etiam ω̅ολυγράμματος licet modeste solitus es dicere te non σοφον, sed φιλὀν φιλοσοφῶν esse, quod ego veram ὲξοχ? veram ὀυγενείαν semper duxi: ita et benevolo, propensoque es animo in omnes literatos, eosque praecipue, qui, quod tribuit musa sagax, non invide apud se detinent, sed θεομιμ? μενοι in commune conferunt. Deinde officii mei ratio postulat, in rusticorum more beneficia tua in me immerito saepe collata deglutirem, ut aliquod animi grati testimonium exhiberem. Praeterea, quod cerno iam animo, quam tutus mihi sub nominis tui patrocinio futurus sit transitus. Ac spero me hoc tuae insignitum clientelae σημείῳ peramice hospitio exceptum iri, praesertim a sacrae quolibet cultore Minervae. Quo consilio haud immaturo quidem levidense munusculum hoc ex ingenioli {A2} mei cornucopiola depromptum, meritissime, lubentissime que tibi do, dedicoque, obnixe petens, ut illud favente, ac benigno animo accipias, quemadmodum a me animo tui observantissimo exhibetur: hac in re Persarum regem Artaxerxem imitatus, qui, cum pauper quidam Sinaeta nomine, aquam ei utraque vola e flumine Cyro exhaustam obtulisset (nam ex lege omnes pro suis facultatibus Δῶϱα, id est, munera regi praeterequitanti offerentes coram apponebant) grato inquit, animo munus tuum accipio, et in pretiosissimis numero iussis insuper Eunuchis, ut in auream phialam de manibus aquam exciperent: ita si tu (clarissime vir) pro summa tua humanitate, ingenuoque candore Δῶϱον τ?το qualecumque non in auream phialam, sed in fictilem acceptationis tuae urnulam excipere dignatus fueris, totius voti me compotem feceris. Vale (vir generosissime) quem Deus optimus maximus protegat, et conservet aeternum. Gal, Iunius, 1615.

Dignitati tuae servus addictissimus Thomas Granger.

 

 

{n. p.}

 

The Epistle to the Reader, containing the general theoric or true grounds of teaching.

 

There be two main errors, gentle reader, both in teaching and learning, and not so great as common: doubtfulness and confusion. Doubtfulness sometime in the master, and always in the scholar. First, in the master, it is a great error to think that the scholar can profit anything at all by that which he himself, not well understanding, teacheth doubtfully. Again, it is an error not much less that when he, perfectly understanding what he teacheth, regardeth not much whether and how the scholar understandeth and conceiveth the same.

For the reformation of the former, the master must use time and diligence, yea, and meditation also, if need so require that it being first made his own, he may freely and confidently propound it to the scholar, which proceeding not rawly, but ripely from him, the scholar may apprehend, conceive, and digest the same the better. Moreover, when it proceedeth indistinctly and harshly (hiulce) from the master, the scholar conceives a greater difficulty thereof, whereby he is discouraged at the first entry and beginning of his labour, grudging also in his mind at the master’s rigour and unjust dealing, that he should propound and require perfectness of that in him which seemeth difficult enough to himself.

For the amendment of the second, the master {A3} must imagine that those things which are easiest to his understanding are most hard and difficult to the scholars. Therefore it requires good skill and art to condescend from the strength of his man’s understanding, reason, and imagination, and to apply and intermingle them to and with the scholars, gently and softly drawing him after him knowing this: that the scholar hath the same faculties of the soul, perfect but weak, and therefore hath naturally a desire, and rejoicing in that whereby he receiveth increase of strength to perfection, as contrarily he hath no pleasure in that which is too strong for him, no more than the sucking child hath of strong meats. This appears evidently in their plays and sports wherein they do sort, and gather themselves according to their agreeable or differing natures and wits, which thing is natural and common to them with trees, plants, beasts etc., which rejoice in the fellowship of their own kind (but being mixt with others are solitary, even in company) and in their own kind delight most in them, that come nearest to their individual natures and properties. Hominum quoque mos est, as Gnatho knows well enough. And if the master in his discretion and judgement can so play the pantomime applying himself to the scholar, and stealing him as it were by guile, he shall easily perceive the scholar to be much more willing and towards, and in short time find fruitful success of his labours.

But if the parents, which most commonly come in like lords of misrule disturbing and confounding both master and scholar, would dissemble and restrain a little their natural affections with the bridle of reason, taking upon them the person {n. p.} and nature of a master as they should, again, if the master would be answerable to them, taking upon him the person and affection of a father, as he ought, the scholar, knowing the resolution of his parents, would buckle himself to please his master, and to follow his book with diligence, being driven thereto on the one side with the strangeness of his parents, and assured on the other side with the kindness and familiarity of the master. Neither can the strangeness of the parents be such, but their natural love and affection will easily appeare to the child. Nor yet can the familiarity of the master be such, but that his friendliness (as we say), and therefore matter of fear and awe will appear, otherwise Nimia familiaritas parit contemptum.

The child that is thus contained in his duty by this mixt love and fear shall follow his book with willingness, joy and delight, and shall profit marvellously in a short space, being but of indifferent capacity. And if the parents shall manifest their love to their children, especially upon their master’s commendations for their learning and dutifulness, sometimes counterfeiting the same as occasion shall require, it shall encourage them to delight and glory in the performance thereof. But where the case stands contrary to this that I have said, it hath also a contrary effect. There was yet never any that by love and fair means only attained to learning, neither that by mere compulsion, if they attained to some, long retained the same, at least wise did and good therewith, and in neither of them came it to any proof.

Furthermore, doubtfulness in the scholar is a main error in learning, seeing that he which {A4} doubteth knoweth nothing, and therefore learneth nothing (for learning is knowledge) unless it be to talk he cannot tell of what. And this is too common a fault. For in most schools whereas a scholar hath repeated his lesson perfectly and understandingly to the judgement of a stranger, if he shall be well examined in the same, he will either give many answers (I mean guesses) or else will his lips go fast, but he dares say nothing (a foolish kind of lip labour) least he should speak amiss, not knowing the right from the wrong. Whereupon he is thought to be defective in understanding or memory and is counted a dullard, whereas it is but his doubtful learning. For otherwise, if he were sure of that which he would speake or had a more distinct knowledge thereof, he would give a bold and witty answer, yea, and take pleasure in being opposed.

The greatest reason of this uncertainty and doubtfulness is because that children are fantastical and full of imaginations, their understandings weak, their apprehensions confused and reason unperfect; and because their blood is hot and boiling, they are fickle and restless, minding nothing but varieties and novelties being moved to and from with every light object, noting and telling what they hear and see, imitating that they see done of others, and are soon wearied with short continuance even in that they most desired in so much that even their play, if they were held to it by rule, would be as wearisome to them as learning, or if their master should appoint them their play, though otherwise they themselves would happily have chosen the same before any other game, yet will it soon be tedious to them. {n. p.}

Upon this consideration, to avoid doubtful learning, the master must stir them up to attention in their lecture giving, using often to demand as he shall see them careless: what he last spake? What be the words following? What point is at such a word etc. giving reasons why he construeth thus and not thus, expounding their lesson to them in plain words, and in such style and manner as is familiar to them, illustrating the meaning by such vulgar examples and comparisons as are known to them, or may be easily apprehended of them: otherwise it were to teach them other things and to put new fancies into them, which will make them more ignorant, and forgetful of that which is then taught them. For children’s wits, note well, are confounded with varieties at once, being contrary to the course of nature as shall hereafter appear. After lecture given, let him hear someone or other verbatim as it was given, and so remaining ever in the school with them cause them to do his appointments diligently, and that by themselves severally without help one of another making them bold to ask him what they doubt of. Neither let him immediately tell them, but by many interrogations and bouts, as we say, bring them to tell themselves of it. This will cause the child to do his work with understanding and discourse, and make him more careful to remember what he hath learned and what his master tells him, whereas this immediate telling, prompting, and looking in dictionaries makes them do all things by rote and like parrots, quite besides grammar.

Also let him never suffer them to have any toys about them or near them, either brought from {n. p.} home, or devised there: for if such things be present, they will have them always in their hands or in their minds so that, by means of such cowling imaginations, nothing that they do, much less than is told them, can make any fast impression in them, but brokenly and confusedly floateth in their heads. Whereby it commeth to pass that which they have already learned is no president or furtherance to them in that which followeth after, every lesson after many weeks, months, and years being as strange to them as the first was, for any certain knowledge or understanding they have of what they say.

And to speak as the thing is, this is the cause why that many, which are fit for the university falsely so supposed, and some which are at the university (I will not say some graduates), stand as much need of a grammar in their studies as of any other book. For coming to public exercises there, or but in their tutor’s chambers, and therefore careful to do well and fearful to amiss, they begin but then to feel their wants, and most of them to complain of their own in learning.

Now, if anyone ask me why they can make epistles, themes, and speak Latin in the country, and come so to be plunged afterward, I answer it is because they seemed to do well by guess, having gotten by long continuance a certain habit of guessing, that is, parsing and construing and giving rules by certain notes and marks, as the art doth play his feats by observing his master’s gestures, staff, becks, or looks, I mean by their master’s words and certain form of speaking in his questions and demands, rather {n. p.} than by any understanding of the order of grammar, or true meaning of the rule.

And so by much teaching and long continuance (their apprehension and discourse of reason waxing riper as they wax elder), they can begin to construe alone, but by very small direction of grammar. And coming to make school-excercises can partly steal unreasonably, and partly imitates their authors making little or no use of grammar or any part thereof, but doing all by apish imitation and gross theft, being sure of this only, that their author writes true Latin and good matter; and so by guessing what he speakes, tie it to some other such like matter, stolen out of some other place whereby it comes in the end to be a great mishapen body, with never a sound joint in it, knit together with sinews of sand. This is the spoil of their invention, reason, and understanding that few recover till by reason of age, study, and meditation, unless they be very pregnant witted, they come to ripeness of judgement. But some feel the discommodity of this corruption, as long as they live.

The second main error is confusion. The principles of all arts and sciences are natural to the soul, infused into it in the creation, which coming to a well disposed and rightly organized body, as the good musician comes to a good instrument, retaineth the same pure and undefiled, which is called the light of nature, not being disordered and darkened with the unaptness and contagion thereof. Therefore of the diverse disposition and habitude of the body arise those infinite varieties and differences of wits, one being especially apt to one thing, another to another thing, some, as we say, to all things, others to nothing. Now the gathering {n. p.} of sequels and conclusions from those lights or principles by the discourse of reason through observation and experience is generally called wisdom or art, which it effecteth by the two properties thereof, distinction and method. By distinction it separateth and divideth confused and differing things, as all things in the beginning were separated out of the confused mass or “chaos”, wherein they were uniformally contained, one from another. And by method it orderly disposeth and placeth all things of the same nature and kind in order, even as in the frame of the world we see how everything is disposed in wonderful order. Whereupon art is rightly defined to be the comprehension of certain rules or precepts of the same kind to some profitable end. And as it is after this manner obtained, so is it also taught another by the same.

First, there must be principles, or light of nature, in the scholar, otherwise light is not comprehended of darkness. Then the master must apply himself to him by distinct and methodical teaching. Otherwise, he shall increase confusion and breed in him a kind of undistinct and confused knowledge, or rather imaginations, which bring forth nothing: not mending, but marring the wit, making the scholar more foolish, not through defect of nature in the scholar, but disorderly teaching, which instead of helping doth hinder it. Which confusion being made habitual, the scholar coming by reason of age to some maturity of reason and judgement, cannot without much ado reform though he be of good wit, being like to those that having been disorderedly and rudely brought up in the country, and afterward coming to some great place {n. p.} or attaining to some higher calling, do feel the discommodity thereof a long time, whereas they that have been brought up in hill, as if it were in hall, can with little endeavour fit themselves to any thing without any difficulty.

Grammar is therefore for most just cause called the key of arts, not only because it teacheth languages, without the knowledge whereof we can understand nothing, but that which is written in our mother tongue: and so should be deprived of those arts which are invented or perfected by men of other languages, but also because it is a lively pattern and president to the wit in the study of other arts whatsoever, though not for the matter, yet for the manner and method. And if the grammar shall be distinctly, perfectly and methodically taught and learned, it is not only half the languages, but half the matter. For even as he that hath perfectly learned grammar hath gotten half the language, so he that is perfect in the method of an art, oration, epistle, etc., hath half the knowledge and understanding thereof. Futhermore experience teacheth that what we are taught, and as we are taught when we are young, maketh such an impression in our wits and memories, as that it becometh natural unto us, neither can we wholly relinquish nor forget the same. This both common observation and daily experience proveth, for they that have been brought up with good schoolmasters do also prove good schoolmasters. Contrarily, they that have been taught confusedly and ignorantly, though more by their own aptness than by their master’s good preparation, they come to be good scholars in the university, yet are they new to begin again, for matter of grammar {n. p.} and teaching, which they find to be as troublesome a piece of work as all their university’s study and practise, if ever they make good country scholar. And this is not one of the least and rarest causes why there are more good scholars then good schoolmasters. But to speak of this abuse of confused teaching in particulars, wherein it is commonly offended, would be too tedious in this place, which together with the reformation thereof I intend to speak of in another treatise.

To proceed further. This error of preposterous teaching is altogether committed in the prevention of nature. For all do build upon the foundation of custome and conjecture, not upon the rock. Therefore though some do seem to do very well sometimes, yet it is more than they perfectly know, and that which a man doth not knowingly (scienter) it cannot truly be said to be well done: it may be bonum factum,a good deed”, yet if it wants the spirit and life of benefactum, of “well done”, it hath not a lively effect or efficacy in the scholar, except the scholar be of a riper wit and quicker imagination than the master, as sometimes falleth out. But he that speaketh and teacheth knowingly and maturely, exhibiteth the commentary of his words in his countenance and gesture.

Nature, then, is the rock or foundation of art. He therefore that teacheth him to whom nature hath denied ability to learn, or that teacheth anything to him that hath ability before that nature showed forth her powers, do both build on the sand, and teach the parrot to speak. And such learning is forgotten as soon as it is gotten. For the hasting of nature beyond settled and constant course is {n. p.} not helping, but hindering. That learning therefore that is gotten or rather taught in the outrunning of nature is a floating imagination, or rather wandering phantasm or dream, whose ground is the master’s breath, and not sensible feeling and conceit thereof in the scholar’s reason. For it is not in the willer nor in the runner, but in nature that giveth the gift with the measure thereof, and perfecteth the same by her own science and in her own time. And it is our science to observe, and know nature’s science, and to apply ourselves unto it: for as the Philosopher saith (Physics book two, chapter two), ϰ̔ τεχνϰ̓ μιμειτου τ? ϕὺοιν, “art imitateth nature”. Therefore, though fantastic people are most delighted and in love with their own antiques or groundless buildings, yet this is the only true ground and science. And how far soever we differ and disagree from it, even so much greater is our error, seeing that art is the scholar of nature. Many, for want of due consideration and knowledge hereof, do miserably torment both their scholars and themselves, the one being the other’s torturer, whereas it is a great delight to teach and to learn, if so be that the scholar be not of too froward and perverse will, the master too impatient, and the ignorant parents too much meddling.

For the clearer understanding hereof, that thou mayst imitate and apply thyself to nature in thy practice of teaching, observe first the science and work of nature in vegetables. The corn of wheat being sown in the ground, nature, which is the invisible substance, or seed, first worketh on the sperm or floor thereof, receiving so much perfection and strength from the same as fitteth it for the womb of the earth. Then it fasteneth the attractive {n. p.} mouth or root in the earth drawing nourishment there from, as the child doth from the body of the mother. Afterward it cometh to birth appearing out of the earth a small spire hardly to discern from any other graine, which shortly groweth into a leaf, after which grow other leaves: then the blade which is strengthened and defended with the leaves after that the ear etc. Herein, and in all other things, observe the imagination or science of this cunning artificer nature, how distinctly and methodically she contriveth, and in time perfecteth the building up of herself. The carpenter or graver by his science or imagination beginneth, and perfecteth his work without himself, but nature within herself: even as if the science or imagination of the ingraver should be operative within the tree, distinctly and methodically framing and fashioning an image of the purest and best thereof, but expelling the gross and unprofitable, as bows, bark, knots, etc.

And as the art of engraving is uniformally contained in the mind of the carver, but when a piece of wood is offered to him to work on, the uniformal and invisible vertues one after another orderly and methodically show themselves in the framing, fashioning, and growing of this unshapen log (which is the element of the work) into a pleasant image etc. Even so in the seed of all vegetables or growing things and of all sensibles, that is, of beasts, foules, fishes etc., is uniformally contained the whole natures, properties, qualities, colours, fruits, actions, etc. of the plant or beast whatsoever. Which after that it hath a womb or matrice beginneth to work out of it a body upon itself. The full growth and perfection of which {n. p.} works or edifice plainely showeth to man’s senses what nature or science lay hid in the seed invisibly.

Now for to reflect this light of the macrocosm, or the great world, upon the microcosm, or man, that the schoolmaster may ground his teaching on nature, especially the true foundation following her even in her steps, without aberration or extravagation, and not upon bare imaginations, uncertain conjectures and imitation of others.

Sperma hominis, most ignorantly called of some excrementum lumborum, being indeed the very prime and quintessence of his elementary body, is like the “chaos” or first matter, whereupon the spirit of nature or imagination, being moved, is made living, containing in it invisibly and uniformally the whole nature of man, his brutal wisdom, reason, fantasy, sense, conditions, complexion, qualities, actions, etc. I speak not of the immortal soul, but of her plasma or vessel, which vertues, powers or faculties one after another show themselves distinctly and methodically in time and season. First the vegetable vertue of the invisible seed, or spirit of imagination, even as the wheat corn, worketh on the sperm, adapting (fovente solummodo matrice) the first degree of the body’s formation therefrom. Then it draweth matter from the body of the mother (non solum fovente, sed pascente matrice) whereon it worketh and frameth the liver, heart, brains, and other members, and is called “embryo”. After that the vegetable vertue hath thus far distinctly and methodically brought and wrought the matter, then moreover the sensible vertue, and first of feeling, showeth itself. And now hath it made itself a fit tabernacle or house {B} for the supercelestial substance, the soule, which comes not into it by propagation of generation, but by immediate creation and infusion. And is now called νήπιος, an infant.

After this followeth motion, and having such strength and perfection as the matrice can afford it, it cometh to birth, that is passeth out of the matrice of the little world into the womb of the great world wherein it worketh and whereout it draweth food unto the perfection of itself, as it did in the first matrice. And being perfected in this great womb, there being no other matrice to receive it for further perfection, it beginneth to decline by little and little, then dieth, and is dispersed into this great body out of which it was taken at the first: the soul also returning to God that gave it.

Now, being come into the matrice of the great world, it receiveth further strength and perfection from the common air, the mother’s milk, etc., whereby the other senses are actually perfected. After this, the common sense showeth itself, which apprehendeth the species, or, as I may say, the visions of the outward senses, but at the first uniformally. Then the imaginative virtue or fantasy appeareth, which at the first receiveth those species or shows from the common sense, but as uniformal and indistinct glances. After it appeareth the memorative faculty, which at the first remembereth uniformally and indistinctly also, but afterward some one vehement phantasm maketh distinct impression, etc.

And thus, when all the organical faculties have obtained convenient perfection, then the intellective virtue or understanding appeareth forth in operation, {n. p.} which is proper only to the reasonable soul that reflecteth itself, both upon itself and upon all things. And this it doth orderly and methodically. First by apprehension of simple notions, not as they are mere shows in the fantasy, but as having an affection to argue or to be argued. Secondly, then, by composition or joining together things agreeing by affirmation, and separating and disjoining things disagreeing by negation, called propositions affirmative and negative. Thirdly, after that, by syllogizing or reasoning, videlicet, confirming or refuting questions by this or that reason or argument. Fourthly by ordination or methodical disposition of things of the same kind declared, explicated, amplified, illustrated, and also confirmed etc., by arguments and syllogistical discourse, placing the most general and simplest in the first place, and so by orderly descent coming to the most special, and compound in the last place.

Now, after that these faculties of the understanding have received thus much perfection, then the Κοίναι ἐννοι̌αι, that is, the common notions of the knowledge of God and truth in the mind, and the “synteresis”, the knowledge and discretion of good from evil in the conscience begin to appeare and show forth themselves. This is the order and progress of nature, or rather of divine wisdom in nature. Wherein observe and see how precisely and constantly the simple and general faculties, being the meanest, do first appear: afterward, the more special and compound being more excellent, till the whole man be perfected and complete in the most special and most compound. And note that this order of nature cannot possibly be inverted: that is to say, the sensitive power cannot prevent the vegetative, {B2} and so of all the rest, no more than the tree can grow downward into the root. Note also that the coaction, or violent compulsion of nature, I mean the hastening of her beyond her course, is the destruction of nature, at least the hindering of her work.

Even such like is the progress of every art, both in the teaching and learning, and therefore of grammar also: for our own experience may teach us that a man cannot teach or learn “syntaxis” without the knowledge of “etymology” no more than to read before he know his letters. But put the case that he could do them, with what exceeding great difficulty should it be? For at least wise he must have the clarum lumen or understanding, and knowledge of the first inventers, and to learn both together, for haste were confused and indiscreet teaching and learning, and therefore as good as no teaching or learning at all.

Also the violent coaction of the learner, I mean the hastening of him beyond the semblable maturity or ripeness of his natural parts or faculties, is the destruction of his wit and learning, at least wise the hindrance of both, according to the proverb festinans canis caecos parit catulos; and the abortive child either dieth soon or, as we say, thrives not in his person, at last wise a long time. This conturbing and disturbing of the child’s wits makes both him to hate learning, and the master to hate teaching, being both wearied and over-mighted, as we say, about an easy piece of work, and all by taking the wrong end first in hand, as they that would catch wet eels by their tales.

For the reformation of this error, the master {n. p.} must know that art is the reflection of the reasonable soul upon nature, i.e. both upon all things and upon herself, which is proper only to reasonable creatures: wherein as everyone excelleth, so much the more wise is he counted, and is so indeed, but they that are altogether defective herein, are commonly called “naturals”. Now, this reflexion and the growth thereof is in all things answerable to nature itself, and the growth thereof, as before I have plainely showed. He therefore that taketh a child to teach, must know that he hath the matter “chaos” (ἰλ?) or seed, wherein the art or arts that he would teach are uniformally or potentially contained. And although in regard of the act of teaching he may be called pater, as Saint Paul calls himself in the work of regeneration, yet in regard of the learner that having the arts of his master, potentially in himself doth suck and extract matter of art from his master, for the building by, and perfecting of himself, he is also called mater, as the same Apostle terms himself.

Therefore, the master must first frame himself to be as the “sperm”, exhibiting the first elements to the scholars’ wit, which are the most simple and general in art, and answerable to the vegetative faculty in nature. After that must prooceed further, and exhibit himself as the matrice of the microcosm that the scholar not lingering longer, then need requireth on the elements, nam non progredi est regredi, may proceed forward both in learning and exercise, making observing always how nature multiplieth herself by degrees, and not suddenly or hastily. For this he must know by observation that as he is to the scholar a matrice, as the sperm is to the seed, the earth to plants, the womb to the infant, and {B3} the great world to all things, so the scholar must receive nothing from him but that whereof he hath a faculty or ability in himself et pro modulo facultatis to be produced into act, and perfected by the master’s teaching. For though the seed be sown in the best ground that is, and in variety of grounds for trial sake, and have all the cost that may be bestowed thereon, yet cannot this add or diminish anything to the nature of the seed, ex spinis non colliguntur uvae. Therefore ought not nature to be compelled, nor struggled to much withal: seeing that teaching is nothing but plantatio et rigatio, “planting and watering”, as Saint Paul saith in spiritual things.

Whereupon let him know that not everything which he teacheth, though never so plain and profitable, doth better the scholar much, but that which he is inclined unto by his own “genius”, or spirit. For nature arrideth that which is agreeable to her and perfective of her, and though the thing be great and weighty in the accomplishment and attainement thereof to others in regard of the means, yet is she not discouraged, but comprehending in general the way and possibility thereof by small moments obtaineth the butt, or mark of her inclination and desires. Hereupon ariseth that common speech proverbially used, “that which will be, will be, and who would ever have thought it”. On the other side, nature is froward and adverse to that which dissenteth from her, having no pleasure nor delight therein, and therefore, though the thing be easy, and means great to the view and judgement of others, yet after much ado, this is the conclusion and fruit, opera et impensa periit. It was a thing that would not be. {n. p.}

Therefore for most just cause is the master compared to a matrice, seeing that the scholar, as the seed, is the agent, and the master the patient. In spiritual things it is quite contrary for the gospel being effectual by the spirit is the agent converting and changing man into the nature of itself, who is therefore a mere patient, being a leper in the purest spirits of his heart and brain, and therefore hath in him no power or faculty at all to attract any spiritual thing, unless to carnalize it, but his powers are infused from above, as the reasonable soul is, etc. Whereupon it followeth by good consequence that the scholar must attain to learning by his own study, industry, diligence, and exercise, using his master as a help, as a nurse, or matrice as I said before. And again the master is to exhibit himself to the scholar as a well mannered, tilled, and pure soil that will bring forth flourishing and plentiful fruits by the strenght thereof, although the seed be but wane and such as will hardly grow at all in barren, lean, and mossy ground knowing this, that the fat pasture causeth the ewes to twinne, et ex fortibus creari fortes.

This that I have said of the scholar’s self-learning is to be well noted, for oft-times the master, partly of conscience, but not too often, and partly to satisfy the earnest desires of the parents, is very diligent in teaching, which maketh the scholar more negligent in learning as the proverb is: a quick handed mistress maketh a slow-heeled servant, and the wheat that is sown in too fat and rank ground, often proves naught in harvest time. Let not the scholar therefore have an idle, careless, and wandering imagination of the master’s {B4} instructions, but let him so fasten on the same, and that in serious musing thereon he may feel the truth and reason thereof in his own understanding, whereby it comes to be made his own, and is not easily forgotten, nay it is never forgotten if the scholar really, not fantastically attracting the same, doth ripely, not rawly, digest it.

That this may be rightly done, two things in nature are to be observed. First, we understand and remember by semblances and places, similitudines et locos. For let a man mark himself when he heareth or readeth something that he presently understandeth not; and again, when he understandeth but feareth to forget, he beginneth immediately to raise up, and sift the phantasms of the imagination, and to call them out of the memory that lie hid and treasured there, which appearing to his mind, do help his apprehension, giving also directions and informations to the discourse of his reason. Hence, it is that they, which are of good memory and quick imagination, are sharp, witty, and eloquent, and commonly, though erroneously, accompted the best scholars, at leastwise have the general applause, for many be fantastical, but few judicious. And though their understanding be but weak, speaking and doing excellently oft-times that which they ripely understand and not, yet he that is contrarily defective in imagination and memory, but of deep apprehension, receiveth great help and furtherance by them: for without those lights of the fantasy, his apprehensions lie hid and obscure to others, yea and to himself, insomuch that he stands need of one to speak that which he thinks and knows, and to be as it were his interpreter. And to utter this more plainly, {n. p.} these two differing sorts of men habent rationem maris et faeminae. For the judicious and apprehensive is helped by the imaginative man, and therefore delighteth in him, and the imaginative man is perfected by the judgement of the other, and therefore rejoiceth in him.

But to digress no further, for much may be spoken hereof, children are very imaginative and full of fancies. And as they are strong in imagination, so are they weak in understanding and discourse; therefore the master must, in as plain sort as may be, manifest everything to their understandings, always calling on them, and urging them to mark well what he sayth to them, asking them if they understand him. For proof whereof let him cause them to rehearse what he hath told them without regarding his words so much as his meaning, which let them declare after their own manner, as they would speak one to another, for if they study chiefly to rehearse his words, ‘tis a token that their memory is better than their understanding, and therefore they take the easiest way, videlicet to repeat some of the words, but to let the meaning go. This urging of them to attention will cause them to bend and reflect their imaginations upon it, and to seek out some semblance or place to illustrate and to give them light for the ripe conceiving thereof. For children are as unwilling to buckle themselves to understand things, as they that delighting to run about on pleasure, love not to be held to any work, unless it be a little for recreation, and when they are weary of other pleasures, as the most delicious things with continuance are loathsome, to make a pleasure of idle labour. And children desire either not to learn at all, or no more than may serve for a recreation, which is in effect {n. p.} just nothing at all.

Therefore, the master is to inculcate often into them the necessity, profit, use, and end of learning, etc., as also of play, etc., so begetting in them a knowledge and a conscience, self-restraints, and self-motives etc. For they know not to what end they were created and born into the world, to what end they are put to school etc., what the end and use of learning is etc. If the schoolmaster shalt not be mute, but ever filling their heads with these things, he shall find the scholars much more willing to learn and to profit more than with all rigour and severity, wherein there is as much difference as there is between him that liveth healthfully by the strenght of nature, and him that lives dyingly by the strenght of physic. Further mark well what I say of filling their heads always with good fancies. It is a most special point, of most schoolmasters very little regarded. The parrot is taught to speak by often hearing the same words, and by often whistling the same notes the thrush is taught to sing. Even so children’s minds run most on that which they daily hear and see, and consequently their words and actions. Also experience may teach us that, when we are furnished with weapons, our minds are also upon every small occasion offered, filled with bloody phantasies, yea, the very sight thereof causeth such glances, will we, nill we, in our fantasies.

The second thing to be observed in nature that the scholar may incorporate and make that his own, which he learneth, is this: all kinds of creatures have their particular imaginations, and natural sciences, according to their kinds, but the imaginations, or sciences of mankind, are manifold {n. p.} and innumerable. And the reason is because that man seeth in himself all the qualities and properties of every creature whatsoever, and is therefore the true Proteus or Vertumnus that can turn himself into any shape and every shape. And this is the cause why some philosophers thought that the first inventers of arts learned their skill of beasts, fowls, and fishes, as spinning of spiders, physic of the swallow, stork, hart, dog etc., music, and building of birds etc. And this is the cause why that the vulgar people, not knowing well what they say, compare one man to a wolf, another to a fox, another to a dog, another to a serpent etc., whereas these sorts of men are not so comparatively, but really: as also we find the same in Holy Scriptures. Now some men are witty and subtle, that is to say, can reflect their reason upon themselves, and playing the pantomimes, or stage-players, cannot only cover their own shame, as all should do, but make an outward show to the world of the contrary. Others again are fools and cannot hide their brutal man. Others are shameless dogs, and will not etc. But he that is illuminated from above, and withal hath a clear natural light, as Salomon etc., can see in himself and others all manner of folly and brutishness etc., which through the spirit of mortification lie dead or curbed in him etc.

Now to make application. Hereupon it chiefly cometh to pass that children’s imaginations are variable, unconstant, and rowling, to and fro inclining them to any brutishness and folly upon every occasion, and always full of trifling fancies and flying glances. And as there is a measurable {n. p.} fitness in them for anything, so will they also be good for nothing, without God’s grace, parents and master’s care etc., and all little enough.

Therefore that learning may take root and impression in them, the master must with great discretion and policy draw them from this variety and mutability to a certain uniformity and constancy, that that seed of learning etc. that he sows and implants in them, having once taken rooting, may be served of the childe’s nature, viz., understanding, reason, imagination, memory, being drawn from other objects and idle impressions, cutting of vain superfluities which all men naturally are subject unto and preserving them from outward contagion of vain, vitious, and idle persons, by whose means the potential follies and vanities of the child are produced into act, and are very hardly curbed again. For such persons are plantatores and rigatores also, whose poisons and infections do surely take effect, seeing that we are naturally declive to vice and folly, but acclive to vertue and true wisdom, being like round heavy stones that of themselves run down the hill, but with much ado are rowled up, as the stone of Sisyphus: and as the earth which is prone to weeds of its own accord but with much toil and labour hardly bringeth forth good fruit, especially if weeds have once gotten upper hand.

The master therefore that would have the child prosperously and happily proceed in learning and good manners must devise, frame, and fill the scholar’s head with witty and good imaginations according to his age and disposition, I mean with similitudes, comparisons, examples etc., recreating them very often with delightful fables {n. p.} and stories profitable both to learning and manners. For children are fantastical, and as they love to hear such things, so shall they hear them in filthy matter and manner, at one hand or other, therefore the master considering children’s dispositions must use revokements and preventions above all things most carefully. Revokements that when the child heareth or seeth such naughtiness, his master’s words and premonitions may come into his mind to retract him. Prevention: by furnishing him and fraughting him with these antidotes, whereby he is better armed and strengthned against outward assaults, then with all corrections and threatenings. For if nature, as we see, be strong of herself, she will with small help of physic expel noisome corruptions and speedily recover herself. And as the ground that is well manred, tilled, and sown thick with corn bringeth forth no weeds, for the corn doth overgrow them, but being thin sown it will gather weeds: even so our nature is such like, as it will bring forth the one or the other, but weeds it will bring forth vice and foolishness, most plentifully if this order aforesaid be not taken.

But I now digress into the reformation of manners which requires a larger discourse than a by-digression. Therefore, I will retire and proceed forward from whence I began to digress whatsoever the master teacheth, let the scholar by perfect understanding thereof make it his own, though he remember not all that he learns, and if it be too hard for him, why should he be taught that whereof he is not at all, or not yet capable? What a folly is it, and a destruction of nature? And what matrice can bring forth, wherein there is no {n. p.} seed, I mean no principles of that art in the scholar, which the master teacheth?

Furthermore, let the master mark well without partiality whether the scholar be defective in understanding and capacity, or he himself in teaching. I myself have known some children orderly and methodically taught much what according to this theoric with delightful and marvelous success, yea almost incredible, which afterward by contrary order have been besotted and have had as good will to their book as a bear to the stake. Again I have known them that have been long confusedly and disorderly taught, as they are in most common schools, that could never be brought from foolish gabling to any understanding at all, till they were brought back to the beginning of the accidence, and of purpose caused to forget whatsoever they had learned before. For having once gotten an habit of parroting they will not bend their reason and imagination, neither can they, to learn and understand distinctly, sensibly and methodically.

It behoveth the master therefore not only to teach truly, as all do not, but also to be the master of that which he teacheth, that is, throughly to understand it, and to be able to make the scholar apprehend it, not always after one way and form, as it were but sundry ways, and especially as he shall see this or that particular scholar of capacity and disposition to apprehend it. For as all have not the selfsame wit numero (as the logitians say) so they do not alike apprehend and understand the same thing, though their wits be all good, if the thing have any difficulty or ambiguity in it, that being ambiguous to one which is not so {n. p.} to another. For let a man tell but an ordinary tale, plain enough even to common wits, yet everyone understands it not alike, therefore in telling it again, one tells it one way and another way, differing not only in words, but also in matter, some telling it distinctly and sensibly, others confusedly and uncertainly, conjecturing rather than knowing what they heard. Furthermore, let sundry men look all upon one thing at once the object of the eye, namely the colour is the one and the same in every eye, but the thing itself offers sundry conceits and imaginations to everyone of them, therefore if any two of them agree in the same conceit, they fall a laughing or smiling which proceeds from an approoving of the consent.

This is a thing of special note in teaching: and it is indeed painful if so be that a man have many scholars, thus to apply himself to every particular which were indeed an excellent course. For when the master speaks to all, he is most commonly heard of all, that is to say of none in particular: unless it be of some, that is as willing to learn as he to teach. And this is the preacher’s case. For all in the church hear him, but few hear him, viz. with special attention to make particular application: the rest supposing that he speaks not of or to him, or him etc., but all. And so this all is a certaine monogrammus, mathematical, as I may say, or imaginary and universal man, and so no one of them is bettered by the preacher, and therefore neither the all. These have the spirit of slumber.

Again if the master speak to one of a form, the rest hear by halves with idle ears and wandering minds, relying upon him that is spoken to, {n. p.} that they may learn of him by rote or prompting, which he received understandingly from the master. In which case one is made, as it were the heir, the rest as younger brethren: and so it happens to them as to younger brothers.

Few masters will be at such pains as this, whereof I speak, unless a good conscience rather move them thereunto, then either the reward or kind consideration and thanks of the parents, which for the most part are won with the goose and lost with the feather; or being rustical stand dodging, because they prize learning at no higher rate than common market-stuff. And who almost regards it, but as it is a means to bring bodily profit or pleasures, as the Epicure’s held and practiced? This is none of the least causes why that schoolmasters in some gentlemen’s houses are respected no more than ordinary serving-men and less. Yea they will say nowadays that they respect and reverence learning, but as for the learned he may go beg with Homer. Judge from what spirit this proceedeth. Surely as it is an easy matter in these politic and heartless days one to beguile another: so is it as easy for Satan to deceive all, as ever it was, seeing that men can so cunningly and wittily (themselves not perceiving their own hearts and spirits) carnalize and epicurize both all human learning and divinity. Et, ut ulmi, sic et nunc spiritus volatiles ubique suos fatuos exagitant.

Thus much, courteous reader, of the true theory and grounds of teaching. Wherein many questions may be demanded by the unskillful, for to satisfy every man in every thing requireth a large treatise, and many objections may be made {n. p.} by the captious. As for the former that are desirous of help in this faculty, but receive not much from these general and remote grounds, I intend to write a treatise at large of the practice of teaching from the very first entrance till the perfecting of a scholar for the university, my reasons of every particular being drawn from this theory whereon I ground my practice.

As for the captious, I answer to them that sophistical and fantastical spirits, and such as are of contradictious dispositions, are no competent judges in those things that are grounded on nature, experience and use, neither are they much to be disputed withal, because their wisdom is only in words, and therefore without good judgement.

Read therefore, I pray thee, consider, practice, and then judge, and I hope that thou and I shall agree in one. If anything that I have done mislike thee, condemn not the work, but amend the fault or say nothing: and when thou thinkest that thou hast mended it, beware that thou be not disliked also of others. Such is the fortune of every work, when it is once exposed to the public censure. Tot sensus, quot capita. But if everyone would or could follow nature their guide, and not bare reading and mere imagination, we should all agree in one, for truth is but one: but imaginations and probabilities are infinite, and too much discoursing with the fantasy is the mother of error, which while that some enforce and constrain, they run into a labyrinth, and may sooner break their wits, then beat out the truth where it is not.

A Deo et natura, non ex phantasia, aut more.

Farewell. {C}

 

{n. p.}

 

Grammar is the art to speak well. It hath two parts: etymology and syntaxis.

Etymology is the former part of grammar, that declareth the interpretation or properties of words severally.

A word is a sign or note whereby we declare the meaning of the mind in naming or calling something.

In a word are to be considered the matter and signification, which is the form.

The matter of a word is divided into letters and syllables.

A letter is the first and simplest matter of a word.

The affections of a letter are prosody and orthography.

Prosody is the true pronunciation thereof, which is perceived by the power.

Orthography is the right writing thereof, which is perceived by the form.

 

Of a Vowel

A letter is a vowel or a consonant.

A vowel is a letter which may make a syllable or word of itself, and without which no syllable can be made: therefore, it is called a vowel.

It is pronounced either with the mouth open, {C2} as a, e, i, or with the mouth shut, as o, u, and the Greek vowel y. They are the five degrees from the widest opening to the narrowest shutting of the mouth in speaking.

The affection proper to a vowel alone is aspiration or breathing.

It is breathed sharpely or softly.

The sharpely breathed vowel is signed with this character or note before it: h. Therefore, seeing it is set before no consonants we rightly pronounce hi-ulcus, Hi-accus, Hi-eronymus, Hi-erusalem, etc.

In Latin words it is sometimes set after c, as charus, pulcher, etc.

In Greek words after four consonants, as Rhodus, Thorus, Chorus, Phillis.

The word that is softly breathed wanteth this note, as amo, onus.

 

Of a Consonant

A consonant is a letter which maketh a sound only with a vowel.

It is single or double.

The single consonant is a semivowel, or a mute.

A semivowel is a consonant that hath the half sound of a vowel.

It is liquid or firm.

The liquid semivowel is pronounced with the lips more open, and as it were melteth in sounding, as l, m, n, r, s.

The firm semivowel is pronounced with the lips more drawn together, and hath an unchangeable sound, as j, jod; v, vau; f.

A mute is a consonant which alone doth only {n. p.} mutter, as it were a certain endeavour to pronounce. It is open or shut.

The open mute murmureth with the lips open, and that partly in the teeth, as t, d, partly in the palate, as c, q, g. Note that k hath the same sound with c, and is utterly unusuall in Latin words.

The shut mute muttereth in the inner cheeks, the lips being shut, as p, b.

The double consonant is made of two consonants, as x, z. X is made of cs, or gs, as in crux and frux, which may be perceived by the genitive cases crucis and frugis.

Z is made of sd, or ss, in the middle of a word. Note that in what word soever y or z is found, the same is derived from the Greeks.

I between two vowels is a double consonant, as maja, Pompejus.

 

Of Quantity

Moreover, the common affection of their form or figure is the quantity thereof. In respect wherof, they are called capital or great letters, and little or small letters. They are in number 25.

The small letters a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, x, y, z, and jod, vau.

The great letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, V, X, Y, Z.

 

Note.

 

Great letters are used first in the beginning of verses, periods, and proper names.

Secondly, being set alone, they signify a forename, which we call our Christian name, and a surname, some title of office, or dignity, something of special note, and also numbers. {C3}

 

Names

A. “Aulus”

P. C. “Patres Conscripti”

C. “Caius”

Q. “Quintus”, “Quaestor”, “Quirites”

Cn. “Cneus” forConsul”

 

Cos. “Consul”, aphaeresis

Res. Respub. “Respublica”

Coss. “Consules”

Sp. “Spurius”

D. “Decius”

Sex. “Sextus”

Deus Opt. Max”, “optimus, maximus”.

S.P.Q.R. “Senatus, Populusque Romanus”

G. “Gaius”

T.C. “Tua Clementia”

L. “Lucius”

Sc. “Senatusconsultum”

M. “Marcus”

Q.B.F.s. “Quod Bonum, Faelix, Faustumque Sit”

P. “Publius”

 

Ms. “Manuscriptus”

 

Hs. “Millies Millia Sestertiorum”

 

P.R. “Populus Romanus”

 

 

Numbers

I.

1

LX.

60

II.

2

LXX.

70

III.

3

LXXX.

80

IIII.

4

XC.

90

V.

5

C.

100

VI.

6

CC.

200

VII.

7

CCC.

300

VIII.

8

CCCC.

400

IX.

9

D.

500

X.

10

DC.

600

XI.

11

DCC.

700

XX.

20

DCCC.

800

XXX.

30

DCCCC.

900

XL.

40

M.

1000

L.

50

 

 

{n. p.}

 

Thus far of the true pronunciation and right writing of a letter.

 

Of a Syllable

A syllable is a full and perfect sound in a word.

It is made of one letter or more.

A syllable of one letter is every vowell, a, e, i, o, u, and y, monophthongs.

A syllable of more letters is made either of two vowels or of a vowel and consonant mixt together.

The syllable made of two vowels is called a diphthong, i.e. the sound of two vowels in one syllable.

There be five diphthongs: ae, au, œ, ei, eu, as aetas, audio, cœlum, hei, euge.

The syllable mixt of a vowel and consonant may contain diverse letters: as, ars, mars, stans, scrobs, stirps.

 

Of Composition

The affections of a syllable are composition, or spelling, and pronounciation.

Composition is whereby they are rightly spelled or set together. First, those consonants must be joined together in the middle of a simple word, which ought to be joined in the beginning of a word.

 

Bd

a-bdomen

gm

a-gmen

because we say

ct

san-ctus

gn

i-gnis

bdellium, Ctesiphon

ps

scri-psi

mn

o-mnis

psittacus, scamnum

sc

pi-scis

st

ve-ster

Tlepolemus, gnarus

tn

ae-tna

pt

pro-pter

struma, Xantippus

tl

a-tlas

xi. and

di-xi. etc.

 

Secondly, if in a simple word of two syllables {C4} the former end in a consonant, the latter shall begin with a consonant, as Gal-lus, etc.

Thirdly, if the latter shall begin with a vowel, the former shall end in a vowel, as deus, pius.

Fourthly, if a consonant be in the middle, it shall be referred to the syllable following, as pa-ter.

S is not written after x, because it is included in x, as excribo, ecscribo.

 

Of Euphony

Pronounciation is whereby syllables are rightly pronounced.

It stands in euphony and measure.

Euphony is whereby certain prepositions in compound words are smoothly and distinctly pronounced and written accordingly.

 

Smoothly

 

Harshly

Distinctly

 

Indistinctly

occurro

 

obcuro

abstineo

 

austineo

officio

rather than

obficio

obtineo

not

ottineo

aufero

 

abfero

obrepo

 

orrepo

affero

 

adfero

 

 

 

effero

 

exfero

 

 

 

 

And for distinct pronounciation sake, consonants are sometimes intermixed, as redamo, redeo, ambigo, ambio; not reamo, reeo, etc.

Contrariwise the preposition con, coming before a vowel looseth n, as coerceo, coinquino, cooperio.

 

Of Time or Quantity.

Measure is whereby syllables in their pronounciation are measured. It is time, or tone.

Time is the holding out of a syllable in the pronounciation thereof.

In regard of time, a syllable is short or long.

A short syllable consisteth of one time, and if need be, it is noted over the vowel, thus Dĕus, mĕus. {n. p.}

A short syllable is:

I. One vowel before another in the same word, as dĕus, pĭus.

II. A, e, y, in the end of a word, as musă, retĕ, moly̆.

III. Every vowel before these letters, r, l, t, d, m, b, in the end of a word.

IIII. I and u before s in the end of a word, as tristĭs, bonŭs.

A long syllable consisteth of two times, and is thus marked -, mūsa.

A syllable is long by nature or by position.

The syllable long by nature is:

I. Every diphthong, as aūdio.

II. I and u in the end of a word, as veni, manu.

III. Every vowel before n and c in the end of a word, as titan, splen, delphin, hac, illac, etc.

IIII. A. e, o before s in the end of a word, as amas, doces, nepos.

A syllable is long by position.

I. When a vowel cometh before two consonants in the same word.

II. When it cometh before a double consonant, as pax, gaza, Maia.

III. When a vowel cometh before two consonants in diverse words, as maior sum, quām cui possit fortûna nocere.

IIII. A short vowel before a mute, and a liquid following is in verse common, as patris, volucris, cerebrum, Hibla. But if the vowel be long, it remaineth so, as arātrum, simulāchrum.

V. O in the end of a word is common, as homo, amo. But in words of one syllable, it is long, as ô, stô, flô.

 

The Affections of Quantity {n. p.}

The affections of quantity are systole and diastole.

Systole is when a long syllable is made short in meter, as Virgil, conūbio iungam stabili, etc.

Diastole is when a short syllable is made long, as Virgil, excercet Dĭana choros, etc.

 

The quantity of syllables is full expressed in these rules following.

 

De primis et mediis syllabis.

Vocalis praeiens aliam, brevis esto latinis.

Tardant vocales alias, alias a breviantque.

Produc b dipthongum, quoque cum positura.

Prae muta, et liquida breve si vocale sit anceps.

Ei longabis quintae, quando immediate.

I praeit, at brevis (ut fidei) si consona praesit.

Fio cum ductis tarda c r, e, m comitentur.

Eheu produces, communis redditur o hae.

Arbitrio brevis aut longus genetivus in ius:

Alterius brevis est, sed produc semper alius.

Tardat vocales d i, consona se praeeuntes.

Primae mensuram e vox derivata sequatur.

Simplicis et legem verbi f composta sequuntur.

Semper corripies, ab, ad, in, re, per, ob super et sub

A tarda g c, de, di, prae, se, pro, Latiumque.

Est pro breve in fugio, cello, fanoque, neposque.

Et fateor, fundus, pago, sectoque profari.

Iunge h propheta, propino, protervus, sic proficiscor

Incurro, fundo, pello, pulso, variatur. {n. p.}

Praeteritum produc dissyllabon, atque supinum.

Tolle bibit, scidit, atque fudit, tulit, ortaque do, sto.

Sic datum, itumque, statumque, satumque, ratumque, quitumque.

Adde situmque, citumque, litumque, rutumque supina

Praeterito gemino brevis est prima, atque secunda.

Fuste cecidit eos dices tamen, atque pependit.

k I, vel o compositi partem finire priorem

Si videas brevia, velut armiger, orthographosque.

Nomen in obliquis quantum sit, flectio monstrat.

His adiectivis penultima sit tibi longa,

Icus, et alis, iungas aris, et orus, et osus,

Atus, et itus, et utus, et ivus, et anus, et enus,

Queis addas l inus, nisi signat m materiale.

A verbi produc crescentis, sed dare deme.

n E produc, nisi prae, rim, ram, ro, queis bĕris adde.

Est i brevis nisi sit praesens o quartae sed et ĭvi.

Sed tibi pluralis dat p venimus, ivimus atque.

q Sum, volo, dant imus subiuncto, rimus, et anceps.

r O semper produc s sumus, et volumus breviato.

 

De ultimis syllabis.

Tarda a, non quiă, pută, ită. a Rectus, quartus, ă, quintus.

In gintam numerus longus, quandoque fit anceps.

B breve. C tarda. Non lăc, nec, donec. At hic, fac.

Neutrum hoc non b sexti: tibi sint communia cuncta.

De breve, t, e. Non c me, te, se. Non d u: caetera rapta.

Verborum iuga, si iubeant, procuce e secunda.

Nominibus (docte ut) produc adverbia ducta.

Haec tria, ritĕ tamen, benè, cum male f corripiantur. {n. p.}

g Quintsextum produc, hodieque, dieque, fideque,

I tarda, (quasi nec nisi) ibi mihi, ubi, tibi, et anceps.

Et h vocat et dat i, graeca, breve os sibi dans genetivo.

Corripias l, sol. Non sal, nil, longa et i Hebraea.

k Est brevis on, brevis in, brevis an, si est rectus ă, non ans

Tarda n. Non forsan, tamen, attamen, an, subin, in, l men.

Quae per inis crescunt, genetivo corripiuntur.

O dubia: obliquis tarda: modo, quo modo nunquam.

m Vix cito, ego, ambo, duo. Crebro, sero, sedulo, n neutra

R breve. Non far, nar, ver, fur, cur, o parque, crater, lar.

Graia in up p longa: pater, et q mater breviato.

Graecum dos gignens as (Pallas, Pallados) esto.

Correptum. r Accusans crescens pluralis in asque.

Omnia in as sunto, si sint, producta, latina.

Es tarda. Brevis est graviter crescens genetivo.

Deme aries, abies, pariesque, Ceres, s pes, orta et,

Es cum compositis, prodĕs, potĕs, adde penĕsque.

t Graecorum neutra, u et pluralia in es breviato.

Is breve. Pluralis casus non corripe x curvos.

Is quoque longabis, si gignens crescit acute.

y Eis producatur dipthongus graeca, latina.

Is, quis, z bis breve: caetera sed monosyllaba produc.

Tarda a verba is, quae faciunt pluralia in itis.

Os tarda, haud impos, b compos, graecum et per o parvum

us breve: non monosyllaba, nec si crescat c acute.

Flectio contracta us dat, non d rectus, nec e vocativus.

Graecula in ous finita sient producta, Melampus.

V semper tarda. Tibi lectio caetera monstret. {n. p.}

 

Scholia.

a Graeci. b Nisi sequente vocali. c Ut fierem, fieri. d Ut maior, peior. e At vōcis, lēgis, regis, sedes, iumentum, fomes, iucundus, iunior, mobilis, hūmanus, vomer, pedor, a brevibus fiunt longae. Contra, dŭcis, dīcax, fides, ărena, ărista, pŏsui, gĕnui, frăgor, frăgilis, nŏto, notas, disertus, sŏpor, a longis fiunt breves. f At innŭba, pronŭba, a nūbo. Deiĕro, peiĕro, a iūro. g Excipe dĭrimo, dĭsertus. h Nisi sequente vocali, ut, unda dehiscens, sudibusque praeustis. i Graeca per o parvum. k Quotidie, et quotidianus variant. Sed ibīdem, tibīcen, fidīcen, ubique, homicida, geometra, meridies, Theophilus, orthodoxus. Scilicet, siquidem, quantilibet, quantivis, l Praeter diutinus, crastinus, pristinus, perendinus, hornotinus, serotinus. m Cedrĭnus, fagĭnus, chrystallĭnus, myrrhĭnus, etc. n Excipitur tertia coniugatio, nisi in reris, et rere imperfecto passivo optativo. o Ut audīs, audītius, audītis. p Penultima pluralis semper corripitur in omnibus. q Ut sīmus, velīmus. r O incremento verborum producitur, s Vero corripitur. Penultima nominum in al, do, go, ela, ile, imen, trīmus producuntur, sed intĭmus corripiuntur. Excipe anĭmal, putĕal. Sic nomina in ītius corripiuntur. Item verba in ŭrio, praeterprūrio, scatūrio. Antepenultimam nominum in ībilis longatur, ut audibilis.

a Nominativus, accusativus, vocativus in a: praeter vocativus graecorum. b Nam hoc ablativi est longa. c Nec ulla monosyllaba praeter quĕ, nĕ, vĕ enclyticas. d Graeca in e, ut Anchisē, Phaebē, Tempē. e Ut docē, movē, cavē. f Sic magĕ. g Ablativus secundae imparissillabis. h Ut Pallas, Palladŏs, Palladĭ. Sic Phyllidĭ, etc. Vocativus Amaryllĭ, Alexĭ, Daphnĭ, etc. i Ut Michael, Daniel, etc. k Ut Ilion (per o parvum) Pylion, Alexin, Ity̆n, Aegină, Aeginăn, {n. p.} Aenaeas, Aenaean, etc. l Et omnia, quae per apocopen castrantur. m Item et homo, vix leguntur producta. n Sic mutuo sunt communia. o Sic composita compar, impar. etc. p Ut aer, aether, soter, character. q Apud latinos. r Ut Heroăs, Phyllidăs, etc. s Ut compes, praepes. t Ut Hippomanes. u Ut Naidĕs, Cyclopĕs, etc. x Dativum et ablativum y Simoeis, omneis, parteis, etc. z Bis tamen apud Ovid.

a Audis, velis, dederis. b Sicos ossis. c Ut tellus, salus, etc. d E singularis numeri.

 

Of Tone

Tone is the tuning or accenting of a syllable.

It is simple or mixt.

The simple is either sharp or flat, called acute and grave.

The sharp is accented with a rising voice, and it is thus noted “ ́”.

The flat is accented with a falling voice, and is thus marked “ ̀”.

The mixt is accented with both voices. It is called of the grammarians “the circumflex”, but of the musicians “a fall”. It is thus marked “ˆ”.

 

Of the Sharp Tone

The sharp tone accenteth words of one syllable whether they be short, as mél, fél, or long by position, as párs, páx.

Secondly, in words of two syllables, the former not being long by nature, is sharpened, as cítus, látus, sólers, sátur.

Thirdly, in words of many syllables the last but one, if it be long, is sharpened, as libértas penátes, otherwise the last but two: as dóminus, póntifex, áffatim, muliéris, cáthédra, mediocris. {n. p.}

Except compounds of fácio, as benefácis, malefácis, calefácit, frigefácit. And compounds of fís, and fít are sharpened in the last, as benefít, satifít.

Note that doubtful syllables in verse do follow the law of the verse, as pictaeque volúcres.

 

Of the Flat Tone

The flat accent is never expressed but in the last syllable to distinguish words, as tristè, cùm. It is called the syllabical accent, because it is understood in every syllable that is not sharpened or circumflect, and they are pronounced with the same tenor of the voice, as, Gratiànopolitanôrum.

 

Of the Circumflex

Words of one syllable being long by nature are circumflect, as spês, flôs, rûs, mûs.

Secondly, in words of two or of many syllables the last but one is circumflect if it be long by nature, and the latter short, as Lûna, mûsa, mâter, Rôma, amavêre, scripsêre. Otherwise, it is sharpened, as népos, amavérunt, scripsérunt, for one long syllable before another is never circumflect.

 

Note

No syllable is circumflect, saving the last but one.

None but some one of the three last syllables in a word is accented.

 

Of the Affection of Tone

The affection of tone is the changing and removing of it from the proper syllable to another, and that by seven means: {n. p.}

I. By distinction: the last syllables of explanatives are accented with the sharp tone, thereby to distinguish them from significatives, as uná, eó, quó, continuó, nequá, siquá, feré, plané, putá, poné, circúm, aliás, ergó, a conjunction, but ergô for cause is circumflect, as Virgil, illius ergô venimus, and many others, which in the end of a sentence are sharpened, but in the consequence or context of a speech are flat.

II. By composition: the accent is changed that the composition may be discerned thereby, as déinde próinde, alíquando, húcusque, àlonge, déinceps, quàpropter, ádmodum, intereáloci, háctenus, etc., otherwise the accent is not changed, as dénique, utique, itaque, vúdique, híccine, etc., but ubîque and ubîvis are excepted.

III. By transposition: prepositions being set after their casual words are flat, as transtra pèr, te penès.

IIII. By attraction: the conjunctions que, ne, ve, dum, sis, nam, and the preposition cum, draw the accent to the syllable next before them, and sharpen it, as luminàque, hominésve, adèsdum, mécum.

V. By interrogation: the accent is removed to the last syllable, as Egoné? Quis furor ô civés?

VI. By aphaeresis: the accent is changed, for such words retain the accent of the whole word, as Vergíli Valéri, ingèni, Mercúri, for Vergílii, etc., or circumflect the last syllable being contracted, as Arpinâs, Ravennâs, nostrâs, vestrâs, cuiâs, of Arpinâtis etc., their proper nominatives. Donec, of donecum hûc, ilûc, istûc, etc., for hucce, illucce, etc. And compounds of dîc, duc, and fac, as benedîc, redûc, calefâc.

VII. By idiom: when words of other tongues do {n. p.} retain their own accents being used in the Latin tongue, as Simóeis, Períphas, georgicà, bucolicà, comaedía, tragedía, symphonía, which being made Latin words do receive the Latin accent, as Símois, périphas, geórgica, bucólica, tragédia, symphónia, etc. And it is the best in borrowed words to use the Latin accent.

The matter of a word is interpreted: signification followeth.

 

Of a Noun Substantive

A word in regard of signification is significative or explanative.

The significative word serveth principally to signify.

It is either a noun or a verb.

The noun is real or personal.

 

A noun is the name of a thing that may be seen, felt, heard, or understood, as manus, “a hand”; domus, “a house”; bonitas, “goodness”.

Of nouns, some be substantives, some be adjectives.

A noun substantive is that which may stand alone in reason or signification, without another word joined to it. And it is so called because it standeth by itself and sustaineth other words which cannot stand without it, as liber, “a book”; Liber magnus, “a great book”; liber legitur, “a book is read”.

Of substantives, some are absolute, some are participles.

The absolute substantive is proper, or common. {D}

A substantive proper is a name proper to the thing which it signifieth, as Petrus, Iohannes, Rhadulphus, Egidius.

The substantive common, which is also called appellative, is a name common to many things, as homo, lapis, iustitia, pietas.

 

Of the Accidents of a Noun Substantive

Six accidents or properties befall a substantive, viz., notation, number, case, declension, gender, comparison.

In regard of these properties, a noun is homoclite, or heteroclite.

Homoclite is when they do evenly or regularly agree to their noun.

 

Of Kind

Notation is kind, or figure.

Kind showeth the original or nature of a word.

It is primitive or derivative.

Primitive hath the original or beginning of itself, as picus, grex, turba, sibilus, tintinnabulum, clangor, etc.

Derivative is made of the primitive. It is nominal, or verbal.

The nominal derivative is made of a noun and it is patronymical or diminutive.

 

Of the Patronymic

The patronymic is derived from the father, grandfather, or some other person of the family or stock, as:

Aeacides

the grandchild of Aeacus, i.e. Achilles

Pelides

the son of Peleus, i.e. Achilles

Atrides

the son of Atreus, i.e. Agamemnon, or Menelaus {n. p.}

Latoides

son of Latona, i.e. Apollo

Nerine

daughter or niece of Nereus

Menelais

wife of Menelaus, i.e. Hellen

 

Of Diminution

A diminutive is that which signifieth the deminishing or lessening of the signification of the primitive. It is used for flattery, mockage, or pity usually.

A diminutive is made of the

nominative case by

changing

us, into

leus

as equus; equuleus; acus; aculeus; servulus; graculus of gracus; regulus of rex; adolescentulus; lununa of luna; animula; aquula; sylvula; mensula; literula; furcula; capitulum of caput

 

 

ulus,

ula,

ulum

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

aster

Antoniaster; surdaster; parasitaster; poetaster; grammaticaster. But they are little in use

 

 

 

x, into

culus,

cula, culum

dicax; dicaculus; fax; facula; fornacula; cervicula; but senex, senecio

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

o, into

unculus,

uncula, unculum

homunculus; but fur, furunculus; latrunculus; carbunculus; tyrunculus; offensiuncula; ratiuncula; virguncula; but homulus, and ardea, ardelio

 

 

 

 

 

asinus, asina; asellus, asella; gemellus, gemella, gemellum; bonus, bellus; agnellus; pugnus, pugillus; unus, ullus; vinum, villum; catella, columella and columnella; signum, sigillum; scamnum, scabellum; scutum, scutella; rana, ranunculus; anguis, anguilla; ager, agellus; cultellus; libellus; puellus, puella; libra, libella; umbra, umbella; sacrum, sacellum; lucrum, lucellum; flabellum; populus, popellus; catulus, catellus; paululus, and pauxillus; codicillus, codiculus of codex; fabella and fabellula; tabella; tantus, tantillus; velum, vexillum {D. 2.}

 

 

 

nus, na, num

llus

 

 

 

er, era, erum

lus, la, lum

into

lla

llum

 

 

adding to it

 

culus,

cula, culum

flos, flosculus; mas, masculus; musculus; corculum; rusculum; munusculum; corpusculum; opusculum; lepusculus; fraterculus; paterculus; amatorculus; muliercula; matercula; sororcula

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dative by adding to

o

olus,

ola, olum

of filio, filiolus; so Tulliolus; alveolus; capreolus of capro; filiola; Tulliola; negotiolum; palliolum

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

i

culus, cula, culum

igni, igniculus; dulci, dulcicolus; api, apicula; navicula; cuticula; ceniculus, cenicula; particula; fonticulus; monticulus; ponticulus; lenti, lenticula

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a word in ui looseth u: as artui, articulus; versui, versiculus; so curriculum; geniculum; corniculum; domus, domuncula, and domicilium

Of the

ablative case by adding to e, cula, as res, recula; spes, specula; vulpes, vulpecula; nubes, nubecula; dies, diecula; but merces, mercedula. Many have only a show of diminutives, as baculus, vitulus, vitula, tabula, fabula, rabula, monedula, catulus, cuniculus, periculum, etc.

 

Of the verbal

A verbally made of the

gerundive by

changing ans and ens into antia, entia, and also entium, as temperantia, patientia, silentium, etc., whereof the English words “temperance”, “patience”, etc.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

putting away the verbs signifying action and apposition of the articles

masculine, as oriens, occidens, profluens, confluens

feminine, as consonans, continens, animan

neuter, as contingens, accidens, antecedeus, consequeus, and animans also



common, as appeteus, sitiens, diligens, indulgens. S, is changed into “t” English {n. p.}

 

 

 

Supinal

active by changing rus into ra, as liturus, whereof litera, flexura, armatura, natura, ctura, cultura, curvatura, etc. A is changed into in English

 

 

Changing

tus

into

tio

of the action

curatio

 

 

 

sus

sio

 

aspersio

 

 

 

xus

xio

 

conexio

 

 

 

 

which by adding n made English words

 

 

 

 

tor, trix

 

rector, trix

 

 

   

 

sor

of the doer

mensor

 

 

 

   

xor

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

which are made English changing or into our

 

 

 

 

trum

aratrum, spectrum

 

 

 

 

chrum

mulacrum, lauachrum

 

 

 

 

men

hortamen, volumen

 

 

 

 

mentum

lamentum, ligamentum

 

“passive” by

active by changing rus into ra, as liturus, whereof litera, flexura, armatura, natura, ctura, cultura, curvatura, etc. A is changed into in English

Changing

tus

into

tio

of the action

curatio

 

sus

sio

 

aspersio

 

xus

xio

 

conexio

 

 

which by adding n made English words

 

 

tor, trix

 

rector, trix

   

 

sor

of the doer

mensor

 

   

xor

 

 

 

 

 

which are made English changing or into our

 

 

trum

aratrum, spectrum

 

 

chrum

mulacrum, lauachrum

 

 

men

hortamen, volumen

 

 

mentum

lamentum, ligamentum

putting away the signification of the verb and apposition of the article “masculine”, as visi and itus, tactus, flexus, which are all of the declension contract

 

Note

Those supinals of the first conjugation that end in itus or in ctus, do form their nouns in atio, as vetitus, vetatio, praestatio, cubatio, domatio, sonatio, crepatio, iuvatio, tonatio, fricatio, etc., but sectio is more in use than secatio. But domitor, adiutor, sector.

 

Of Figure

Figure showeth whether a substantive be simple or compound. Simple, as rector. Compound, as corrector, fideiussio, to which may be added the decompound, as inconstantia, irreverentia. {D3}

 

Of Number

Number is singular or plural.

The singular signifieth one thing alone, as lapis, “a stone”.

The plural signifieth more than one, as lapides, “stones”.

 

Of Case

Case is whereby a noun falleth into diverse constructions.

It is absolute or oblique.

The absolute is whereby a thing is absolutely named without dependence on other words, therefore ’tis called the nominative, or right case.

The oblique is whereby a thing is obliquely named, according to his dependence on other words, which is by five ways, so that there are five oblique cases: the genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, ablative.

 

The Cases Are Thus Known

The nominative case cometh immediately before the verb, and answereth to the question “who”, or “what”, as magister docet.

The genitive is governed and signifieth of “whom” or “what” a thing is, as doctrina magistri. “Of” is his sign.

The dative case is governed and signifieth to “whom” or to “what” a thing is, as do librum magistro. “To” is his sign.

The accusative followeth the verb, whose action immediately passeth into it and it signifieth “whom” or “what”, as amo magistrum.

The vocative case is governed and is known by calling or speaking to, as ô magister. {n. p.}

The ablative case is governed and signifieth from “whom”, or “what” a thing is. It is known either by prepositions serving to it, as de magistro, coram magistro; or by these signs “in”, “with”, “through”, “for”, “from”, and also “by” or “than” after the comparative degree.

 

Of Declension

Declensoin is the varying of a noun according to case.

It is simple or contract.

The simple is parisyllabic or imparisyllabic.

The parisyllabic declension is whose genitive singular for the most part, and dative plural, is always of even syllables with the nominative singular, and it is double.

 

The first declension parisyllabic is when the nominative, vocative, and ablative singular end in a, the genitive and dative in ae diphthong, the accusative in am; the nominative and vocative plural in ae diphthong, the genitive in arum, the dative and ablative in is, the accusative in as, as in example:

 

Singulariter

Nominativo

musa

Pluraliter

nominativo

musae

genetivo

musae

genetivo

musarum

dativo

musae

dativo

musis

accusativo

musam

accusativo

musas

vocativo

o musa

vocativo

o musae

ablativo

musa

ablativo

musis

 

Note

Note that filia and nata do end in is, or in abus in the dative and ablative plural, but dea, mula, {D4} equa, liberta, anima, ambae, duae, do end in abus only.

By hellenism, the genitive singular imitateth the Greeks, as paterfamilias, materfamilias, filiusfamilias, usuall. Dux ipse vias, Ennius; filius Latonas, Livius Andronicus; filii terras, Naevius; nec auras, nec sonitus memor, Virgil. Unusual.

By archaism were used aulai, pictai, bellai, for aulae, pictae, belli, etc.

The genitive plural is usually contracted by “syncope”, as Graiugenum, Aenaeadum, for Graiugenarum, Aenaeadarum.

 

The second declension parisyllabic is when the nominative and vocative singular end in er, ir, us, um, the genitive in i, the dative and ablative in o, the accusative in um. The nominative, and vocative plural in i, the genitive in orum, the dative and ablative in is, the accusative in os, as in example:

 

Singulariter

nominativo

magister

Pluraliter

nominativo

magistri

genetivo

magistri

genetivo

magistrorum

dativo

magistro

dativo

magistris

accusativo

magistrum

accusativo

magistros

vocativo

o magister

vocativo

o magistri

ablativo

magistro

ablativo

magistris

 

Note

When the nominative endeth in us, the vocative endeth in e, as dominus, domine. Except deus, o deus, and filius, fili, meus, mi, genius, geni. Also agnus, lucus, vulgus, populus, chorus, fluvius, end in e, or us, as agne and agnus, etc.

Also all nouns of what declension soever being {n. p.} neuters have the nominative, accusative, and vocative like in both numbers, and in the plural they end all in a, as in example:

 

Singulariter

nominativo

regnum

Pluraliter

nominativo

regna

genetivo

regni

genetivo

regnorum

dativo

regno

dativo

regnis

accusativo

regnum

accusativo

regna

vocativo

o regnum

vocativo

o regna

ablativo ab hoc regno

ablativo

regnis

 

Except ambo and duo, which make the neuter gender in o, and are thus declined:

Pluraliter

nominativo ambo, ambae, ambo

genetivo amborum, ambarum, amborum

dativo ambobus, ambabus, ambobus

accusativo ambos, ambas, ambo

vocativo ambo, ambae, ambo

ablativo ambobus, ambabus, ambobus. Likewise duo, duae, duo.

The genitive plural is often contracted by syncope, as deum for deorum; virum, for virorum.

Some nouns of this declension do increase vir with his compounds: duumvir, triumvir, decemvir, centumvir, levir; so socer, gener, adulter, puer, presbyter, iber, and iberus. And adjectives asper, exter, liber, miser, tener, dexter, gibber, prosper, and prosperus. Caeterus and puerus have been in use. To these add the compounds of gero and fero, as armiger, signifer, etc.

The declension imparisyllabic is whose genitive singular for the most part, and dative plural is always of uneven syllables, with the nominative singular, and it is double. {n. p.}

 

The first declension imparisyllabic is when the nominative and vocative singular do end in c, d, e, o, l, n, r, s, t, x, the genitive in is, the dative in i, the accusative in em and sometimes in im, the ablative in e, or in i, or in both; the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural in es, the genitive in um, and sometime in ium, the dative and ablative in bus, as in example:

Singulariter

nominativo

lapis

Pluraliter

nominativo

lapides

genetivo

lapidis

genetivo

lapidum

dativo

lapidi

dativo

lapidibus

accusativo

lapidem

accusativo

lapides

vocativo

o lapis

vocativo

o lapides

ablativo

lapide

ablativo

lapidibus

 

Of the Genitive Case Singular

I. Certain Greek nouns are derived hither from the first declension parisyllabic, as Aeschines, Aeschinis; Aristides, Aristidis.

II. This genitive is sometimes borrowed of the second parisyllabic, as immitis Achilli for Achillis; duri miles Ulissi, for Ulissis.

 

Of the Accusative Case

I. Some accusatives end only in im, as vim, ravim, tussim, sitim, maguderim, amussim, cucumim, elim. Names of rivers, as Tybrim, Ararim. And many Greek words as Syrtis, Mysis, Thais, Tygris, Tyberis, Daphnis, Paris, change im into in, as Syrtin, Mysin ,etc.

II. Some end both in im and em, as buris, pelvis, clavis, securis, puppis, torquis, turris, restis, feberis, {n. p.} navis, bipenis, aqualis.

 

Of the Ablative Case

I. Nouns of the masculine gender derived of adjectives do end in i, as annalis, affinis, Aprilis, Sextilis, Quintilis, sodalis, rivalis, familiaris. But rudis, the “feminine” rude.

II. Neuters in al, ar, e, most commonly end in i, as vectigal, calcar, mare. Reti of rete. But par with his compounds endeth in e, or i. And these end only in e, far, hepar, jubar, nectar, gausape, praesepe, and proper names Soraste, Praeneste, Reate.

III. The names of months in er, end in i only, as September, Septembri. But the simple, imber, endeth in e, and i.

IIII. When the accusative endeth in im, or in, the ablative endeth in i, as sitim, siti; Mysin, Mysi; Tigrin, Tigri. But Ararim, Arare.

Adjectives in is or in er that make their neuter in e, do end in i, as fortis, mollis, dulcis, acer, acri. But “poets” sometimes use e for i. Other adjectives end in e and i, namely of three genders under one termination, as amans, clemens, faelix, vetus, capax, etc., except pauper, uber, hospes, sospes.

V. When the accusative endeth in im and em, the ablative endeth in e and i, as puppis, puppe, and puppi.

VI. All verbals in trix end in e and i. So certain substantives ignis, amnis, anguis, suppellex, unguis, vectis, avis, ovis, classis, fustis, finis, and sometimes civis.

VII. Likewise all comparatives as doctior, doctius, doctiore or doctiori. To which add nostras, vestras, {n. p.} cuias, and gentiles Arpinas, Fulginas etc., which are contracts of nostratis, vestratis, etc, now not used.

VIII. Proper names like to adjectives end in e, as Lateranensis, Iuvenalis, Martialis, Faelix, Clemens, etc.

 

Of the Nominative Plural

I. In the nominative plural we say Sardis, Trallis, not Sardes, Tralles.

II. Neuters ending in e in the ablative case do form the nominative plural in a, as corpore, corpora.

III. When the ablative singular endeth in i only, or in e and i, the nominative plural in the neuter endeth in ia, as concordi, faelici, molli, dulci; concordia, faelicia, etc., except ubera and all comparatives, as doctiora, molliora, etc., but plura and pluria; aplustra and aplustria.

 

Of the Genitive

I. When the ablative endeth in i only, or in e and i, the genitive plural endeth in ium, as puppi, tristi, tristium. Except comparatives and these following, as supplicum, complicum, artificum, strigilum, vigilum, veterum, memorum, pugilum, inopum; but plus, plurium.

II. When the ablative singular endeth in e, regularly the genitive plural is evermore contracted, as honore, honorum; milite, militum; doctiorum. And diverse others, especially verbals in ans or ens, as sapientum, serpentum, prudentum, parentum, etc.

III. When the nominative singular endeth in two consonants, the genitive plural endeth in ium, {n. p.} as pars, urbs, falx, glans, trabs, merx, partium, urbium, etc., except hiemum, principum, participum, municipum, forcipum, inopum, caelibum, clientum; as, assium; mas, marium; vas, vadium; nox, noctium; nix, nivium; os, ossium; mus, murium; faux, faucium; caro, carnium; cor, cordium; alituum of ales; bos, bonum; in the dative bobus or bubus.

IIII. When the genitive singular is of even syllables with the nominative, the genitive plural endeth in ium, as collis, mensis, accris, collium, etc. To these are added litium, ditium, vitium, salium, manium, penatium. But canum, panum, vatum, iuvenum, opum, apum, are excepted.

V. The names of feasts being only plurals do make their genitive most commonly in orum, which is borrowed from the second parisyllabic, as Agonalia, Vinalia, Vinaliorum; sometimes in ium, as Floralia, Feralia, Feralium; sometimes in both, as Parentalia, Saturnalia, Saturnaliorum, or Saturnalium.

 

Of the Accusative

When the genitive plural endeth in ium, the accusative endeth in es or eis the diphthong as partium, partes, or parteis, omnium, omnes, or omneis.

 

Rules Whereby to Decline All Words of this Declension, and to Know the Gender

The genitive case, increasing or not increasing, and consequently all cases, are known by the termination of the nominative.

There be seventy terminations of the nominative, as hereafter followeth. {n. p.}

 

Seventy Terminations

a, ac

e

i

o

u

y

al

ec

id

ol

ud

yn

an

el

il

on

ul

ys

ar

en

in

or

ur

yr

as

er

ir

os

us

ybs

ax

es

is

ox

ut

yns

abs

ex

ix

obs

ux

yps

aes

ebs

ibs

ois

uls

 

aex

ems

io

ons

uns

 

ans

ens

ips

ops

unx

 

aps

eps

inx

ors

 

 

ars

ers

 

 

 

 

alx

erx

 

 

 

 

anx

eus

 

 

 

 

arx

 

 

 

 

 

aus

 

 

 

 

 

aux

 

 

 

 

 

 

A of Two Letters

a

ac

atis

thema, poema, problema, so Zeugma, a city etc. are all Greek neuters and make the dative and ablative in is or in ibus. Lac, lactis neuter

al

ālis

minutal, animal, vectigal, cervical, tribunal, capital, puteal, which seem to be contracted of neuters in le, and do end therefore in li in the ablative, so Ipsal, a city

 

ălis

Hannibal, Asdrubal, etc., masculine, so sal, if it be declined in both numbers, but if it lack the plural, it is a neuter {n. p.}

an

anis

Titan, Acharnan, Paean, masculine

ar

āris

pulvinar, laquear, lucar, calcar, exemplar, etc., contracts, which therefore make i in the ablative; far and nar, is also sometime a neuter; car, masculine

 

ăris

Hamilcar, Caesar, lar, but Lar, Lartis, a man’s name. Par, with his compounds, compar, impar, separ, dispar, nectar, neuter, bacchar, feminine

 

ătis

Hepar, Hepatris, neuter

as

ātis

probitas, charitas, facultas, etc., feminine all. Magnas, masculine, and primas

 

asis

vas, vasis, neuter

 

aris

mas, maris, masculine

 

atis

anas, anatis, common

 

adis

lampas, monas, trias, decas, doras, dipsas, Pallas, chilias, hebdomas, enneas, Greek feminine, Aetias, Phaetontias, Archas, common. Vas, vadis; as, asses, masculine

as

antis

adamas, elephas, Gigas, Acragas, Garamas, Chalcas, masculine. Pallas, son of Evander

ax

ācis

pax, fornax, feminine, thorax, Phaeax, Thrax, anthrax, masculine, and all adjectiues in ax, as audax; bibax, bibacis

 

ăcis

Greek appellatives and gentiles, storax, dropax, Atax, Athrax, Pharnax, Briax, Syphax, which only maketh ācis and ăcis, masculine. Abax, smilax, panax, colax, and limax, common. Caudax, fax, feminine

 

ahis

Astinax, Hylax {n. p.}

 

A of Three Letters

abs

abis

Arabs, Arabis, masculine. Trabs, trabis, feminine

aes

aeris

aes, aeris, neuter. But praes, praedis, masculine

aex

ecis

faex, fecis, feminine

ans

antis

infans, common. Sextans, dodrans, quadrans, masculine, and all participles in ans

 

andis

glans, glandis, feminine

aps

apis

laelaps; daps, dapis, feminine. But daps is unusual

ars

artis

Mars, masculine. Pars, ars, feminine whose compounds change a into e, expers, iners

alx

alcis

falx, feminine. Calx, “a heel”, common. Calx, “lime-chalk”, masculine

anx

angis

phalanx, phalangis, feminine

 

ancis

lanx, lancis, feminine

aus

dis

fraus; laus, laudis, feminine

arx

cis

arx, arcis, feminine

aux

cis

faux, faucis, feminine. But the nominative is unusual

 

E

No words ending in e do increase, and they are all neuters.

 

E of Two Letters

ec

ecis

halec, feminine. Perfect in both numbers, but the neuter lacking plural

el

elis

all Hebrew words, Raphael, Michael, Daniel. But mel, mellis; fel, fellis, neuter wanting plural, but mel hath the three like cases {n. p.}

en

inis

pecten, masculine. Oscen, common. Tibicen, cornicen, liticen, lyricen, tubicen, of cano, masculine. And Flamen, “a heathenish priest”, also certamen, crimen, culmen, inguen, and about seventy more neuters

 

enis

lien, attagen, splen, ren, lichen, masculine. Syren, feminine

er

ĕris

anser, passer, praester, acipenser, epicene. Later, vomer, masculine. Pauper, puber, degener, uber, adjective. Aer, aether, masculine. Mulier, feminine. Siler, suber, cicer, sicer, laser, piper, tuber “a toad-stool” and “fruit of a tree”, spinter, acer, verber, cadaver, papaver, iter, tineris, uber, gingiber. But ver, veris, Iupiter, Iovis

er

ēris

Greek words in ϰϱ, make eris, soter, character, crater, panther, stater, etc., ser, masculine

er

tris

pater, venter, frater, accipiter, masculine. Campester, pedester, equester, paluster, sylvester, adjectives. Linter, common. Mater, feminine. So volucer, volucris, volucre; celeber, celebris, celebre; alacer, alacris, alacre, adjectives, do not increase imber, imbris

es

ĕtis

seges, teges, abies, feminine. Interpres, indiges, common. Hebes, teres, perpes, praepes, adjective. Paries, aries, masculine

 

ētis

quies, requies, inquies, feminine. Magnes, tapes, lebes, cres, cures, masculine. And proper names Mendes, Thales, Dares, Chremes, Chremis, and metis, Caeres, retis and ritis, common. Locuples, adjective. But Ceres, Cereris, feminine. And bes, bessis, masculine

 

edis

merces, feminine. Haeres, common. Pes, pedis, masculine. Compes, compedis, feminine {E}

 

itis

ames, stipes, limes, fomes, termes, tudes, trames, cespes, gurges, palmes, poples, masculine. Ales, antistes, eques, veles, satelles, miles, comes, pedes, hospes, and hospita, common. Dives, sospes, common, and sospita

 

idis

obses, praeses, common. Deses, reses, adjectives of sedeo

 

is

nubes, aedes, clades, labes, contages, cudes, fames, indoles, lues, cautes, moles, sepes, rupes, sedes, soboles, sordes, strues, tabes, pubes, apes, vepres, adipes, fides, feminine. Vates, common. Greek words in es are neuter. Verres, masculine, do not increase

ex

icis

apex, ramex, latex, vertex, and vortex, caudex, and codex, pollex, podex, masculine. Forfex, carex, feminine. Vibex, vibicis, feminine. Obex, imbrex, silex, cortex, culex, pumex, iudex, vindex, opifex, artifex, aruspex, illex, index, common. Pellex, Ilex, feminine. Supplex, adjective. But supellex, supellectis feminine

 

ecis

resex, mirmex, vervex, masculine. Nex, necis; prex, feminine unusual. But lex, legis, with his compounds aquilex, exlex, illex, lelex, common. Rex, regis, and grex, gregis, masculine

 

igis

remex, remigis, masculine. But senex, senis, common

 

E of Three Letters

ebs

ebis

plebs, plebis, feminine. But caelebs, caelibis, common

ems

emis

hiems, hiemis, feminine {n. p.}

ens

entis

dens, bidens, triens, torrens, masculine. Lens, mens, gens, feminine. Bibens, serpens, rudens, cliens, parens, adolescens, common. Amens, demens, adjectives, and all participles with their verbals in ens

 

endis

libripens, masculine. Nefrens, common. Lens, feminine

 

untis

iens, euntis, with the compounds, abiens, iniens, abiens, rediens, periens, euntis. But ambiens, ambientis

eps

ipis

itis

adeps, princeps, forceps, common. But anceps, ancupis, and seps, sepis, “a serpent”; municeps, particeps, anceps, biceps, praeceps, praeciptis, contracts of ancipes, bicipes etc.

ers

ertis

expers, iners, of ars, adjective

erx

cis

merx, mercis, feminine

 

I

No Latin words in the nominative singular end in i.

 

I of Two Letters.

id

idis

David, Davidis

il

ilis

pugil, vigil, common. Mugil, epicene. Sil, neuter. Pervigil, adjective

in

inis

delphin, masculine, and Delphis, Salamin, feminine, and Salamis, and Salamina

ir

iri

vir, with his compounds levir, duumvir, triumvir, etc.

is

itis

Samnis, Samnitis; Quiris, masculine. Lis, feminine. Charis, Charitis, short feminine

 

 

lapis, masculine. Cassis, cuspis, iaspis, aegis, aspis, aclis, ibis, tyrannis, cenchris {E2}

 

idis

pyramis, pixis, Isis, Persis, Iris, bolis, coronis, feminine, and Osyris, masculine. So Greek patronymics, Aeneis, Aeneidos or Aeneidis, and many in is, making dos short. But crenis, crenidis; Nesis; Psophis

 

eris

pulvis, vomis, cinis, masculine

 

inis

sanguis, pollis, masculine. In old time sanguen, pollen, neuter were used. Trachis, Trachinis, long

 

iris

glis, gliris, masculine

is

is

amussis, auris, avis, basis, bipennis, biremis, callis, chelis, clavis, classis, cutis, faucis, febris, melis, messis, naris, paralysis, ovis, pellis, pestis, poesis, proneptis, ratis, securis, sementis, tussis, bilis, sitis, vis, opis, vicis, stipis, scobis, strigilis, novalis, buris, cannabis, pelvis, ravis, navis, turris, puppis, feminine

ix

icis

ibix, calix, varix, masculine. Silix, histrix, filix, fornix, salix, coxendix, pix, chaenix, feminine. Cilix, of Cilicia, common

 

icis

cornix, coturnix, pistrix, radix, lodix, cervix, matrix, nutrix, feminine. Phaenix, masculine. Perdix, common. Spadix, faelix, pernix, adjective. All verbals in trix, as victrix, etc., feminine

 

igis

mastix, mastigis, masculine, and Phryx, of Phrigia

 

ivis

nix, nivis, feminine

 

I of Three Letters

ibs

ibis

Libs, Libis, masculine

inx

ingis

Syrinx, Syringis, feminine, and Syringa {n. p.}

irps

irpis

stirps, common, “a plant”. But “a stock”, or “issue”, feminine

io

onis

legio, dictio, not used in the nominative. Contagio, titio, masculine. Io, a proper name etc., so ratio, natio, and all verbal in tio, sio, xio, feminine

 

enis

Anio, Anienis, a river. Nerio, wife of Mars

 

O

O of Two Letters

on

ōnis

Harpago, in accusative plural, harpagines; aquilo, udo, ligo, cento, cudo, Sulmo, spado, senio, ternio, sermo, masculine. So all nouns signifying “a body”, as ardelio, agaso, carbo, capito, fronto, naso, epulo, draco, mango, congerro, fullo, helluo, labeo, latro, nebulo, praeco, praedo, pugio, susurro, sapo, struthio, salmo, pavo, capo, umbo, temo, unio, calcitro, verbero, apexabo, mucro, caupo, erro, pulmo, and very few more. But unedo, titio, and Dido, Calypso, Iuno, etc., feminine

 

ŏnis

Certain gentiles, Macedo, Brito, Saxo, vangio, lingo etc

 

inis

All in do and go, as dulcedo, formido, libido, siligo, compago, sartago imago, lanugo, virgo, grando, feminine. Ordo, turbo, masculine. Cardo, margo, common. Apollo, masculine. Homo, nemo, common. But caro, carnis, feminine

ol

olis

Sol, solis, masculine, the only word in ol {E3}

on

ōnis

Damon, Ladon, Simon, trigon, Triton typhon, masculine. Babylon, Sidon, feminine. Python, common, and all Greek nouns increasing by o, magnum

 

ŏnis

Agamennon, canon, daemon, masculine. Gorgon, Amazon, sindon, feminine. Orion, Aegeon, Edon, ōnis and ŏnis; Architecton, Palaemon, and all such increasing by o, parvum

 

ontis

Aaron, Phaeton, chamaeleon, masculine

or

ōris

Amor, timor, rumor, honor, vapor, clamor, labor, which have also honos, vapos, clamos, labos, sopor, plural. Car, masculine, and about some fifty more besides verbals in tox, sox, xor, and comparatives, all masculine. Discolor, versicolor, adjectives. But uxor, soror feminine. Autor, common

 

ŏris

Castor, Hector, Rhetor, masculine. Arbor, and arbos, feminine. Aequor, ador, marmor, neuter. Memor, bicorpor, indecor, adjectives

 

 

Cor, with the compounds excors, vecors, socors, concors, adjectives

os

ōris

mos, moris; lepos, flos, ros, rorium, genitive plural masculine. Glos feminine. Os oris neuter. Orium, genitive plural

 

ossis

os, ossis, neuter. Exos, exossis, adjective

 

ovis

bos, bovis, boum, genitive plural common. Dative bobus, bubus

 

odis

custos, custodis, common

 

otis

nepos, masculine. Cos, dos, feminine. Sacerdos, common. But compos, impos, otis, adjectove. Eros, Rhinoceros, Aegoceros, masculine. Monoceros, feminine {n. p.}

 

ois

Minos, heros, tros, masculine

ox

ōcis

Volvox, masculine. Atrox, velox, ferox, adjective

 

ŏcis

Cappadox, masculine. Coelox, feminine. Praecox, praecocis, and coquis, adjective. Nox, noctis, feminine

 

ogis

Allobrox, polyphilox, masculine

 

O of Three Letters

obs

obis

Scrobs and scrobis, feminine. But Scobs, scobis, feminine

ois

oentis

Simois, Simoentis; Pyrois; but diplois, diploidis, feminine

ons

ontis

mons, fons, pons, masculine. Frons, bifrons, common. Spontis, sponte, feminine. Sons, insons, adjective

 

ondis

frons, frondis, feminine

ops

ōpis

Cercops, Cyclops, canops, hydrops, masculine

 

ŏpis

Aethiops, cecrops, Dolops, masculine. Ops, a goddess, and opis, “help”, feminine. Inops, adjective

ors

ortis

Mors, sors, with his compounds, consors, exors, adjectives, so cohors, and fors, forte, diptote feminine

 

ordis

The compounds of cor, excors, vecros, socors, discors, concors

 

U

U of Two Letters

ud

udis

bogud, bogudis

ul

ulis

praesul, consul, exul, common {E4}

ur

uris

vultur, furfur, turtur, masculine. Murmur, sulphur, guttur, neuter, so Anxur, Tybur, cities, but Anxur, is also masculine. Augur, Ligur, common. But fur, furis, common. Cicur, adjective

 

oris

ebur, or ebor; robur, or robus, or robor; iecur, iecoris, iecinoris, iocinor. Also, femur, neuter

us

udis

incus, subscus; palus, paludis, feminine. But pecus, pecudis, feminine

 

uris

rus, thus, ius, crus, pus, note mus, masculine. Tellus, feminine. Plus, adjective. But sus, suis; grus, gruis; ligus, liguris, common

 

utis

virtus, salus, servitus, senectus, iuventus etc., all feminine intercus, inter cutis, short adjective

 

eris

vellus, olus, onus, latus, funus, munus, genus, vleus, viscus, opus, pondus, rudus, fidus, scelsus, neuter. Vetus, adjective. But Venus, Veneris, feminine, a goddess

 

untis

Opus, Opuntis, a city, Hydrus, Trapezus, and Cerasus, a city

 

oris

litus, nemus, facinus, faemus, tergus, tempus, decus, corpus, pecus, pectus, penus, frigus, pignus, neuter. But lepus, masculine, lepus, or lepos, eloquence, leporis

 

odis

tripus, Oedipus, Oedipodis, masculine

ut

itis

caput, sinciput, occiput, neuter

ux

ucis

nux, crux, lux, which want the plural feminine. Pollux, masculine. But dux, ducis, common. Trux, redux, ucis, adjective

 

ugis

Frux, feminine. But coniux, or coniunx, iugis, common {n. p.}

 

U of Three Letters

uls

ultis

puls, pultis, feminine

uns

untis

aruns, decuns

unx

uncis

septunx, feminine. Deunx, quincunx, masculine

 

Y

Y of two Letters

Y

yos

moly, epy, feminine

Yn

ynis

porcyn, gortyn, feminine

Ys

ydis

chlamis, chlamydis, feminine

Ys

yos

Phorcys, Phorcyos

Yx

ycis

Eryx, “a hill”, and a man’s name. Sandyx, masculine. Bebryx, a man’s country, ĭcis, and īcis. But bombyx, bombycis, masculine. Chalyx, “a flint”

 

ychis

onyx, and sardonyx, sardonychis, common. Ceryx, masculine, and Ceyx, son to Iupiter.

 

ygis

Oryx, masculine. Styx, feminine.

 

Y of Three Letters

ybs

ybis

chalybes, chalybis, masculine

yns

ynthis

Tyrins, Tyrinthis, a city and a river

ynx

incis

lynx, lincis, common

yps

yphis

gryps, gryphis, masculine

 

The Second Imparisyllabic {n. p.}

The second declension imparisyllabic is when the nominative singular endeth in ies, the genitive and dative in iei, the accusative in iem, the ablative in ie. The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural in ies, the genitive in ierum, the dative and ablative in iebus, as in example:

 

Singulariter

nominativo

Meridies

Pluraliter

nominativo

meridies

a Virgil sayth dii; Salust die by contraction

genetivo

a meridiei

genetivo

meridierum

dativo

meridiei

dativo

meridiebus

accusativo

meridiem

accusativo

meridies

vocativo

o meridies

vocativo

o meridies

ablativo

meridie

ablativo

meridiebus

Note that these four plebes, res, spes, fides, do end ei short in the genitive and dative singular, as plebei, rei, spei, fidei.

Note also that many ending in ies are made the first parisyllabic, by changing the last syllable into a, as luxuries, luxuria; mollities, mollitia.

 

Of the Declension Contract

The declension contract ariseth of the first imparisyllabic, which increasing by is pure, causeth the former syllable to be contracted with it into one. The nominative and vocative singular doth always end in us, the genitive in uis, contracted into us, the dative in ui without contraction, the accusative in uem into um, the ablative in ue into u. The nominative, accusative, and {n. p.} vocative plural ues into us, the genitive uium into uum, the dative and ablative in uibus into ibus, and sometime into ubus, as in example:

 

Singulariter

nominativo

manus

Pluraliter

nominativo

manus

genetivo

manus

genetivo

manuum

dativo

manui

dativo

manibus

accusativo

manum

accusativo

manus

vocativo

o manus

vocativo

o manus

ablativo

manu

ablativo

manibus

 

Note

Terence useth the genitive without contraction, as eius anuis causa for anus.

The dative is seldom contracted to distinguish it from the ablative, yet it is sometimes contracted into u, as Virgil, quod neque concubitu indulgent. Terence, vestitu nimio indulges.

Terence borroweth the genitive from the second parisyllabic, as nihil ornati, nihil tumulti.

The genitive plural contract is further contracted sometimes by syncope, as currum, for curruum.

The dative, and ablative, is contracted into ubus, in these following, as acus, lacus, artus, arcus, tribus, ficus, specus, quercus, partus, veru, partus, which hath also portibus, but in all other into ibus, as faetibus, fructibus, etc.

The holy name Iesus is thus declined after the Greeks, as nominative Iesus, genitive Iesu, dative Iesu, accusative Iesum, vocative Iesu, ablative Iesu.

 

Here followeth a Table of the Declensions {n. p.}

 

Singulariter

1. Parisyllabic

Nominativo

Genetivo

Dativo

Accusativo

Vocativo

Ablativo

 

a

ae

ae

am





e

like the nominative

a

2. Parisyllabic

er, ir, ur, um, us

i

o

um

o

1. Imparisyllabic

c, l, t,

d, n, x,

e, r,

o, s



is



i



em

im

e

i

e, i

2. Imparisyllabic

ies

iei

iei

iem

ie

Contracted

us

us

ui

um

u

 

Pluraliter

Nominativo

Genetivo

Dativo

Accusativo

Ablativo

ae

arum

is

as

like the nominative

like the dative

i

orum

is

os

es

um

ium

ibus

es

ies

ierum

iebus

ies

us

uum

bus

us

{n. p.}

A Table of the Declining of Greek Words

 

Nominativo

Genetivo

Dativo

Accusativo

Vocativo

Ablativo

 

1.

Parisyllabic

as

es

e

ae

ae

es

ae

ae

e

an, am

en, am

en

a

es, e, a

e

a

e, a

e

Aenaeas

Anchises

Penelope

2.

Parisyllabic

eus

os

on

ei, eos

i

i

ei

o

o

ea, um

on

on

eu

e

on

eo

o

o

Orpheus

Delos, Logos

Ilion, Barbiton

1.

Imparisyllabic

a

an



is



ys

es

as

o

 

tis

os



ios

dos

yos

eos

ntis

us

ti

i



i

di

yi

ei

nti

oi

a

a



in

da

yn

ea

anta

o

a

an



i

i

y

es

a

o

te

e



i

de



e

te

o

Thema

Titan



Metamorphosis

Phillis

Tethys

Achilles

Pallas

Dido, Calypso, etc.

These words being changed into Latin are declined according to the Latin rules.

 

Gender {n. p.}

Gender is the difference of a noun according to sex. It is simple, or double.

The simple is natural, or feigned. Natural is masculine or feminine. A word of the masculine gender signifieth the male kind or those things that are conceived by the male kind, and it is signed commonly with the pronoun hic, as hic vir.

A word of the feminine gender signifieth the female kind or those things that are conceived by the female kind, and it is signed commonly with the pronoun haec, as haec mulier.

A word of the neuter gender signifieth neither male, nor female, nor anything that may be conceived by them, and it is signed with the article hoc, as hoc saxum.

The manifold gender is epicene or common. A word of the epicene gender signifieth the male and female under one voice and one gender, as hic passer, haec aquila, both the heder, and sheder, and to discern the kind we say aquila mas, aquila femina.

A word of the a common gender signifieth the male and female under one voice and two genders, as homo, infans, bos, bubo. It is signed with hic and haec.

 

Note

a Where note that so long as we speak of the same sex, we may not change the gender of the adjective, as to say, canis haec quam velocissime curreret, ni esset faetus, is incongruous speaking.

Note also that whereas the sex is utterly unknown, authors do use the same sometimes in the masculine, sometimes in the feminine gender, which {n. p.} words are therefore called of the grammarians the doubtful gender, wherein we may change the gender of the adjective at our pleasure, as to say, durus est hic cortex, eademque est amara, is not incongruity. But it is a needless thing to make this a distinct gender from the common, seeing that upon notice of the sex it is the common, as serpens, bubo, dama, halcionis, etc. And it is better in liveless things to keep the gender of the adjective than to change it, as common use showeth:

The gender may be known three ways, i.e. by

signification

termination

declension

 

I. By Signification

By signification the gender is known whether the substantive be proper or common.

 

Substantives Proper, Masculines

All proper names of gods, of men, and their proper offices; of winds, months, and rivers, are of the masculine gender, as Apollo, Virgilius, Lybs, October, Tibris.

 

Substantives Proper, Feminines

All proper names of goddesses, of women, and their proper offices, of towns and cities, of isles, and countries, unless they do end in on or um, are of the feminine gender, as Venus, Philotis, Opus, Britannia, Persis.

 

Exception of Cities

Abydos, Lesbos, Sulmo, Agragos are masculines. Argos, Tybur, Conclave, Praeneste, Ispal, are neuters. Anxur is both masculine and neuter.

 

Substantives common, feminines

All names of trees are of the feminine gender, as alnus, cupressus, cedrus, fagus, ficus, malus, {n. p.} pirus, prunus, ulmus, populus, platanus, mespilus, cerasus, buxus, citrus, corylus, fraxinus, terebinthus, iuniperus, cornus, myrtus, amygdalus, persitus, volemus, arbutus, sambucus, esculus, tremulus, myrrhus, corymbus, caprificus, morus, pinus, sorbus, spinus, ornus, etc. And most plants, as myrtus, nardus, intibus, etc.

 

Exception

Except oleaster, pinaster, pyraster, taxus, rubus, masculines. Libanus, pampinus, commons. Siler, suber, acer, thus, robur, neuters. Also many plants are masculines, rhamnus, paliurus, helleborus, tribulus, thyrsus, thymus, calamus, ebulus, crocus, etc.

 

Substantives Common, Epicenes

All names of fowls, beasts, and fishes, if the male and female cannot manifestly be discerned, are of the epicene gender. Now, whether we must use the masculine or the feminine, that must be learned by the declension.

 

Substantives Common Neuters

 

2. By Termination

I. All words that end in um, except the names of men, and women, and all in on, by o parvum, are of the neuter gender, as Noricum, Brundusium, cynnamomum, balsamum, barbiton, Ilion.

II. All nouns indefinites or undeclined, as nil, gummi, nefas, etc.

III. All words in ma, derived from the Greeks, as thema, problema, etc.

IIII. All Latin words ending in e, le, and al, except sal, as mare, rete, mantile, pectorate, capital, ammal, etc.

V. All in ut, as caput, sinciput, occiput. {n. p.}

 

3. By Declension

The Gender of the first Parisyllabic

I. All Latin nouns of this declension are of the feminine gender, as capra, mensa, mappa, etc.

II. Greek words in a, or e, derived from their second declension, as musa, grammaticae, rhetorice, Helene, which being made Latin words are changed into a, as grammatica, rhetorica, Helena.

 

Exception

I. The names of men with their offices are masculine, as scriba, assecla, scurra, rabula, lixa, lanista, etc.

II. All words derived from the first declension of the Greeks which do end in as or es, and are made Latin by changing as and os into a, as satrapas, satrapa; athletes, athleta; so cometa, planeta, nauta, pirata, palaestuta, papa, agyrta, eremita, poeta, etc., except margarita, cataracta, charta, catapulta, cochlea, gausapa, which being masculines in the Greek, are feminines in Latin.

III. These are commons, dama talpa, auriga, verna, conviva, refuga, profuga, pincerna, idiota, concuba, and compounds of venio, colo, gigno, cado, as advena, convena, agricola, caelicola, indigena, terrigena, Graiugena, homicida, patricida, fratricida, matricida.

 

The Gender of the Second Parisyllabic

I. All nouns of this declension that end in er, ir, ur, are masculines, as aper, vir, satur.

II. All Latin nouns ending in us, and Greek nouns in os, as dominus, logos.

 

Exception

I. Humus, domus, alvus, colus, vannus, are {F} feminines.

II. Certain Latin words in us, derived from Greek words in os, as papyrus, antidotus, costus, dipthongs, byssus, abyssus, crystallus, synodus, saphirus, eremus, arctus, biblus, periodus, methodus, plinthus, dialectus, apostrophus, balanus, etc.

III. These are commons, ficus, “a disease”, phaselus, lecytus, atomus, grossus, Pharus, paradisus.

 

The Gender of the First Imparisyllabic

A noun of this declension either doth not increase, or doth increase in the genitive case.

A noun increaseth not when there be no more syllables in the genitive than in the nominative, and they end in es, is, er, or, e, whereof es and is are feminines, er masculines, and e neuters.

 

Exception of Masculines Not Increasing

I. These masculines are excepted, verres, lienis, natalis, acinaces, aqualis, orbis, alcis, iugalis, callis, retis, ensis, ignis, follis, caulis, fustis, crinis, mensis, collis, panis, unguis, penis, cassis, torris, fascis, vermis, piscis, axis, vectis, postis, bessis, laris, maialis, aedilis, riualis, assis with his compounds.

II. These commons are excepted, canalis, amnis, clunis, finis, testis, iuvenis, restis, halcionis, corbis, anguis, scrobis, hostis, sentis, civis, vates, perduellis, patruelis, extorris, canis, affinis, sodalis, contubernalis.

Nouns in er are masculines, but mater is the feminine, and linter the common.

A noun increaseth when there be more syllables in the genitive than in the nominative, the penultimate whereof is short or long.

 

Nouns Increasing of the Masculine Gender {n. p.}

I. Most nouns in es, is, er, il, ul, increasing short in the last syllable but one, are masculines.

II. Nouns ending in or, os, and o, signifying a body, the penultimate long in the genitive case, except gentiles, as Saxo, Saxonis, etc.

III. All verbals in tor, sor, xor.

 

Nouns Increasing of the Feminine Gender

Of the feminine gender are very many increasing long in the penult, as

I. Nouns increasing by atis, utis, and udis, as, pietas, virtus, palus.

II. Verbals in tio, sio, xio, trix, increasing by onis and icis long.

III. Many nouns of one syllable ending in s with a consonant before it, as ars, stips.

IIII. Nouns in do and go, increasing short by inis, as dulcedo, virgo.

V. Nouns in x, making the genitive in cis, as pax, faex, fax, lanx.

 

Nouns Increasing of the Neuter Gender

I. Of the neuter gender are nouns ending in al or el increasing long, as animal, mel.

II. Nouns in ar increasing long, and in ur increasing short, as far, murmur.

III. Nouns in en increasing short by inis, pecten, and compounds of cano are only excepted, as, tibicen, tubicen, etc.

IIII. Nouns in us increasing short by eris and oris, as faedus, corpus.

Note that these rules have many exceptions, which are to be found in the terminations of the first imparisyllabic.

 

The Gender of the Second Imparisyllabic

All nouns of this declension are of the feminine {F2} gender, except meridies which is of the masculine, and dies, which is the common in the singular number, and the masculine in the plural.

 

The Gender of the Declension Contract

All nouns of this declension are masculines, and most of them verbals in tus, sus, xus, as auditus, tactus, census, flexus.

 

Exception

Except these feminines following, porticus, tribus, socrus, nurus, manus, idus, acus, penus, colus, lacus, specus, anus, domus, and certain trees, as laurus, cornus, ficus, pinus, quercus, platanus.

 

Of Comparison

Comparison befalleth a substantive, not properly, but abusively, as Neronior, a Nerone; Cynaedior, a Cynaedo; Paenior, a Paeno.

 

Thus far of a noun homoclyte.

 

Of a Noun Heteroclite

A noun heteroclite is to which these accidents do not evenly or uniformally agree to wit number, case, declension, gender.

An heteroclite is varying, defective, redounding.

 

Variation of Gender

I. These nouns are masculines in the singular number and neuters in the plural, Maenalus Dindimus, Ismarus, Tartarus, Taygetus, Taenarus, Pangaeus, Massicus, Gargarus, Baltheus, iussus, supparus. {n. p.}

II. These are feminines in the singular and neuters in the plural, Pergamus, intibus, arbutus, carbasus, amygdalus, pyrus, supellex, which may want the plural.

III. These are neuters in the singular and feminines in the plural, delicium, epulum, nundinum, balneum. Juvenal hath balnea.

IIII. These are neuters in the singular and masculines in the plural, caelum, Argos, Elisium.

 

Redundance of Gender

I. These being masculines in the singular are both masculines and neuters in the plural, as, sibilus, iocus, locus, Avernus.

II. These being neuters in the singular are masculines and neuters in the plural, as rastrum, fraenum, filum, capistrum, claustrum.

 

Defect in Number

Furthermore an heteroclite is defective, and that in

number

case

 

Defectives in the singular

I. These masculines want the singular, manes, maiores, cancelli, liberi, antes, menses, monthly terms, lemures, fasti, minores, natales, penates, annales, amitini, antipodes, boni, cani, caelites, centumviri, decemviri, decumani, clitellarii, cognati, conspirati, evocati, inferi, libelli, magni, magnates, optimates, optimi, ordines, patricidii, patres, posteri, primores, proceres, purpurati, pythonici, renes, soles, summates, superi, superiores, etc. Also many names of places, as Gabii, Locri, etc.

II. These feminines want the singular, exuviae, phalerae, grates, manubiae, idus, antiae, insidiae, minae, {F3} excubiae, nonae, nugae, tricae, calendae, inferiae, feriae, primitiae, plagae, netrs, valvae, divitiae, nuptiae, aedes, lactes, amitinae, angustiae, argutiae, bigae, blanditiae, camenae, copiae, cupediae, dapes, decumae, epulae, facetiae, fauces, fores, fortunae, icunculae, indubiae, ineptiae, Pleiades, medicinae, Musae, Naiades, Opes, tenebrae, palpebrae, pecuniae, potestates, praestigiae, partes, primae, secundae, etc., reduviae, reliquiae, umbrae, furiae, Gratiae, virgiliae, vires, sordes, literae, suppetiae, quadrigae, aquae, calidae, thermae, funerae. Also many names of places, as Sardes, Amiclae, Pherae, Thebae, Athenae, etc.

III. These neuters want the singular, arma, mapalia, maenia, munia, iusta, rostra, praecordia, sponsalia, lustra, effata, exta, crepundia, tesqua, cunabula, castra, acta, adespota, aestiva, Alcedonia, ambarvalia, analecta, apophoreta, armamenta, aromata, avia, aulaea, bona, centaurea, cibaria, cineralia, comitia, compita, compitalia, confinia, dictata, donaria, chranica, femoralia, feminialia, forensia, freta, frivola, Ceraunia, genitalia, genualia, gesta, honoraria, Ilia, impedimenta, initia, initiamenta, lacticinia, lina, magnalia, magalia, menstrua, miscellania missillia, muliebria, Olympia, palearia, pascua, pecuaria, pensa, pontificia, popularia, praescita, pythia, falsamenta, semina, seria, suprema, fraga, flabra, talaria, tempora, repotia, verenda, ulnatia, robigalia, funeralia, hiberna, iuga. Proper names, as Cythera, Artaxata, Bactra, Susa, Ceraunia. Names of feasts, Orgia, Nycteria, Bacchanalia, Floralia, etc. Titles of books, Bucholica, Georgica, Chronica, etc.

 

Defectives in the Plural

These want the plural number. {n. p.}

I. All proper names of men, women, towns, countries, floods, months, winds, and woods, and whatsoever is distinguished by some proper name.

II. Vertues, as prudentia, sapientia, iustitia, temperantia, etc. a Vices, as stultitia, invidia, desidia, etc.. Diseases, metals, aurum, argentum, ferrum, stannum, cuprum, plumbum, etc.

III. All things that are rather measured than numbered, as gluten, butyrum, sebum, etc.

IIII. Nouns signifying a certain time, as hesperus, vesper, diluculum, aestas, infantia, aevum. And pax, mors, vita, fames, salus, lues, tabes, labes, fides, soboles, pix, lux, sitis, bilis, talio, tussis, senecta, iuventus, humus, cholera, pubes, fuga, quies. And also sol, aer, sanguis, aether, nemo, pontus, pelagus, limus, fimus, tellus, aluus, caestus, album, fascinum, caenum, senium, lethum, salum, solum, barathrum, vitrum, viscum, penum, iustitium, nihilum, ver, lac, halec, gelu, solium, iubar.

V. Most herbs want the plural.

 

Defectives in Case

I. These have no cases, and are therefore called aptotes, fas, nefas, nihil, and nil, instar, cornu, genu, gummi, frugi, Tempe, sesqui, gausape, specus, veru, mancipi, mille, neuci, pondo, praesto, virus, huiusmodi, cuiusmodi, illiusmodi, istiusmodi, eiusmodi, necesse, necessum, quid, expes, tot, quot, and all numbers from three to an hundred.

II. These have but one case, called monoptotes, noctu, natu, iussu, iniussu, promptu, permissu, ablatives. Macte, vocative. Ambage, ablative, so astu, ablative singular. Astus, accusative plural. Inficias, accusative plural.

III. These have two cases called diptotes, fors, forte; spontis, sponte; repetundarum, repetundis; iugeris, {F4} iugere; verberis, verbere; impetis, impete; melos, melo; tabi, tabo; chaos, chao; plus, pluris; suppetiae, suppetias; grates, grates. Amongst all these, cornu, genu, ambage, verberis, plus, iugeris, have all the cases plural, but veru wants the nominative.

IIII. These have three cases, called triptotes, vicis, vicem, vice; opis, opem, ope, which hath the plural whole, but vicis wants the genitive. So dicam, dicas, dicis; situs, situm, situ.

V. These want the nominative case only, and are called pentaptotes, dapis, remigis, precis, frugis, necis, proceris, faucis, ditionis. Nemo wanteth the genitive. Frondis, vis, feminis, want the dative, and frons the nominative, is unusual. All relatives, distributives, infinites and all pronouns except noster, nostras, meus, tu, do want the vocative case. All which have the plural whole.

VI. These neuters have only the three like cases in the plural number, hordeum, far, forum, mel, mulsum, defrutum, and thus.

VII. All nouns of the second imparisyllabic have the three like cases plural only, except res, species, facies, acies, dies.

 

Note

Proper names that have the singular number do want the plural, and they that have the plural want the singular.

 

Redundance

I. These redound in gender and termination, and some in declension also. Tonitrus, tonitru; clipeus, clipeum; baculus, baculum; sensus, sensum; tignus, tignum; tapetum, tapete, tapes; punctus, punctum; {n. p.} sinapi, sinapis; sinus, sinum; menda, mendum; peplus, peplum; penus penus, penum peni, penus penoris; buxus, buxum; capulus, capulum; viscus, viscum; cornu, cornum; eventus, eventum; fimus, fimum: angiportus angiportus, angiportum angiporti, angiportus angiporti; cacabus, cacabum; caduceus, caduceum; calcaneus, calcaneum; callus, callum; calvities, calvitum; candelaber, candelabrum; capo, capus; currus, currum; catinus, catinum; catillus, catillum; catinulus, catinulum; cavus, cavum; cingulus, cingulum; coccus, coccum; clivus, clivum; cementarius, cementarium; crocus, crocum; chrystallus, chrystallum; dorsus, dorsum; fascinus, fascinum; galerus, galerum; ganea, ganeum; gausape, gausapes, gausapa, gausapum; gipsus, gipsum; labrusca, lambruscum; helleborus, helleborum; incestus, incestum; malluvia, malluvium; mandibula, mandibulum; mariscus, mariscum; mulctrale, mulctra, mulctrum; palatus, palatum; nardus, nardum; patibulus, patibulum; pileus, pileum; pistrina, pistrinum; porrus, porrum; pulvisculus, pulvisculum; sarculus, sarculum; supparus, supparus; thymus, thymum; scalpellus, scalpellum; peniculus, penicillus, penicilllum; scrupulus, scrupulum; caupo, cupo, cupa, capa; batilius, batilum; cochleum, cochlis, cochlidium; corallius, corallum; expensa, expensum; contagio, contages, contagium; conventus, conventum; hibiscus, hibiscum; lixivia, lixivium; pavus, pavo: Pergamus, Pergamum; dupondius, dupondium; chirographus, chirographum; amygdala, amygdalum; penaria, penarium.

II. These redound in termination and some in declension, but not in gender, gibbus, gibber; cucumis, cucumer; stipis, stips; cinis, ciner; vomis, vomer; scobis, scobs; pulvis, pulver; pubes, puber; honor, honos; labor, labos; ador, ados; arbor, arbos; vapor, vapos; delphin, delphinus; apes, apis; plebs, plebis, plebes; elephas, elephantus; congrus, conger; Meleagrus, Meleager; Teucrus, Teucer.

III. These redound in declension only. Laurus, quercus, pinus, ficus, penus, domus, lacus, colus, cornus, {n. p.} “a tree”, which are of the second parisyllabic, and contract declension.

The substantive absolute is interpreted, the participle followeth.

 

Of the Participle Substantive

A participle hath certain accidents of a substantive to wit, case, and declension, but the signification of a verb.

It is a gerund, or a supine.

 

Of the Gerund

The gerund is of the second parisyllabic, and is thus declined:

nominativo

amandum

genetivo

amandi

dativo

amando

accusativo

amandum

vocativo

caret

ablativo

amando

 

Of the Supine

The supine is of the declension contract, and is thus declined:

accusativo

amatum

a diptote

ablativo

amatu

 

It serveth rather for elegancy and copy than for necessity.

Thus far of the substantive, the adjective followeth.

 

Of a Noun Adjective {n. p.}

A noun adjective cannot stand alone in reason or signification, but must needs be joined to a asubstantive, as bonus vir, ingenuus puer, liber crassus, murus albus.

Of adjectives some are absolute, some are participles.

The absolute is proper or common.

The adjective proper signifieth an affection proper to the thing alone, to which it is joined, as Gradivus is properly attributed to Mars, Quirinus to Romulus, Enosigaeus to Neptune. And are therefore sometimes put alone without the substantives, as Virgil, Remus, cum fratre Quirino, Iura dabant.

The adjective common signifieth an affection common to many substantives, as piger, alacris, candidus, clemens.

 

Of the Accidents of an Adjective

Seven accidents befall an adjective: kind, figure, number, case, declension, gender, and comparison.

 

Of Kind

An adjective of the primitive kind is interrogative or numeral.

Interrogatives are these: quis, uter, qualis, quantus, quotus, quot, nunquis, which are also sometimes used indefinitely, sometimes arelatively. To these add their redditives, talis, tantus, tot.

 

Of numerals there be diverse kinds

I. Cardinals, whereby things are absolutely numbered, {n. p.} as unus, duo, tres, quatuor, quinque, sex, etc.

II. Ordinals, whereby things are numbered according to their order, as primus, secundus, tertius, etc.

III. Distributives, whereby the same number is distributed to every one of many things, as creabantur olim bini consules, id est per singulos annos duo. For so the orators, but not the poets, do use the signification of these nouns. Binus or bini, two distributed to each thing, ternus or terni, three to each thing, etc.

IIII. Partitives, which either signify many things severally, as quisque, unusquisque, uterque, neuter, or one thing of many, as, alter, alius, aliquis, caetera, reliquus. To which may be added quilibet, quivis, alteruter.

V. Universals, which signify the whole nature of the substantive, as omins, conctus, nullus, nemo, nihil, totus. Omnis signifieth all the particulars or severals of the discrete quantity. Totus, the parts of the continued. To these add i., compound interrogatives which are infinites, as quisquis, qualisqualis, quantusquantus, quotusquotus, uteruter, quotquot, and compounded with cunque, as quicunque, qualiscunque, quantuscunque, quotuscunque, quotcunque, and uniuersus, i.e. simul totus, or simul omnis.

VI. Particulars, which signify not the whole nature, but some part of the substantive, as aliquis, quisquam, ullus, quidam.

 

Of the Derivative

An adjective is derived of some other word or of itself. {n. p.}

I. Of the substantive proper, whether gentile, as Graecus, Latinus, Haebraeus, Anglus, or signifying a more particular place, as Eboracensis, Londinensis, Cantabrigiensis, Oxoniensis, Doroborniensis, Aetonensis.

II. Of the substantive common are derived most adjectives, as herilis, servilis, regius, paternus, hortensis, agrestis, maritimus, montanus, etc.

III. Of the adverb, as hodiernus, hesternus, crastinus, clandestinus.

IIII. Of the preposition, as supernus, supinus, posterior, inferior, etc.

 

Of the Verbal

V. Of the verb, whether it be gerundive or supinal.

Adjectives are made of the gerundive, whether it be active or passive.

They are made of the gerundive, active, two ways.

I. By taking away the verbal signification, as abundans, amans, audiens, abstinens, efficiens, ferens, fugitans, furens, negligens, patiens, praestans, reverens, servans, appetens, cupiens, experiens, fugiens, fidens, metuens, observans, potens, sitiens, and all that may be compared, whose English most commonly end in ant or ent.

II. By changing ans or ens into bundus, which are used instead of verbs frequentatives that are wanting; therefore, because we cannot say lusitans, risitans, erritans, populitans, vititans, moritans, rubitans, furitans, laetitans, we say ludibundus, ridibundus, errabundus, populabundus, vitabundus, moribundus, furibundus, laetabundus, but rubicundus, not rubibundus. {n. p.}

They are made of the gerundive passive also two ways.

I. By taking away the verbal signification, as amandus, docendus, videndus, scribendus, as puer amandus, “a lovely child”. Legendis veteribus proficis, “by old authors reading thou profitest”.

II. By changing ndus into bilis, as amabilis, detestabilis, penetrabilis, audibilis, docibilis, etc., signifying passively.

Adjectives are made of the supinal active and passive two ways.

I. By taking away the verbal signification, as nociturus, visurus, praetermissurus, etc., so consideratus, circumspectus, disertus, cautus, tutus, ignotus, argutus, falsus, contentus, tacitus, profusus, fluxus, scitus, discretus, adultus, defectus, doctus, indoctus, consultus, eruditus, expertus, lapsus, inactus, suspensus, and all that may be compared.

II. By changing tus, sus, xus, into tilis, filis, xilis, which signify as their supinals do, sometimes actively, sometimes passively, as fictilis, coctilis, rasilis, pensilis, flexilis, tortilis, tonatilis, futilis, sculptilis, altilis, volatilis, fissilis, umbratilis, versatilis, ductilis, plicatilis, fissilis, solutilis, sectilis, docilis, fragilis, futilis, fluviatilis, which signify passively, unless their verbs want the passive voice.

Adjectives are derived also of themselves to wit diminutives and comparatives.

Diminutives follow the rules of the substantive, as parvulus, gemellus, integellus, intedulus, limatulus, politulus, putidulus, ullus, maiusculus, minusculus, etc.

Comparatives are derived of their absolutes: as, durior, durissimus, of durus. {n. p.}

 

Of Figure

Figure is either simple, as iustus, or compound, as iniustus, or decompound, as irreparabilis.

 

Of Declension and Gender

The declension of the adjectives is known by the termination. And all adjectives are of every gender, which is distinguished by the termination also.

The termination is simple or manifold.

The simple termination is when three genders are comprehended under one voice, as faelix, teres amans, particeps etc. Of such like terminations are all adjectives of the first imparisyllabic, as:

Singulariter

nominativo

faelix

Pluraliter

nominativo

faelices and faelicia

genetivo

faelicis

genetivo

faelicium

dativo

faelici

dativo

faelicibus

accusativo

faelice and faelix

accusativo

faelices and faelicia

vocativo

o faelix

vocativo

o faelices and faelicia

ablativo

faelice and faelici

ablativo

faelicibus

The manifold termination is double or threefold.

The double termination comprehendeth the three genders under two voices: the masculine and feminine, always ending in is; the neuter, in e, except comparatives that end in or and us, as tristis, triste; tristior, tristius. They are of the first declension, imparisyllabic not increasing in the genitive case, except comparatives that increase by oris.

Singulariter

nominativo

tristis and triste

Pluraliter

nominativo

tristes, tristia

genetivo

tristis

genetivo

tristium

dativo

tristi

dativo

Tristibus

accusativo

tristem, triste

accusativo

tristes, tristia

vocativo

o tristis, triste

vocativo

o tristes, tristia

ablativo

tristi

ablativo

tristibus {n. p.}

The threefold termination is when the three genders are expressed by three voices. The masculine ending in er, ur, us; the feminine in a; the neuter in um. The feminine is of the first imparisyllabic, and the other two of the second.

 

Singulariter

nominativo

bonus, bona, bonum

Pluraliter

nominativo

boni, bonae, bona

genetivo

boni, bonae, boni

genetivo

bonorum, bonarum, bonorum

dativo

bono, bonae, bono

dativo

bonis

accusativo

bonum, bonam, bonum

accusativo

bonos, bonas, bonae

vocativo

bone, bona, bonum

vocativo

boni, bonae, bona

ablativo

bono, bona, bono

ablativo

bonis

But these eight with their compounds make the genitive case singular in ius, the dative in i, to wit unus, totus, solus, and also ullus, alius, alter, uter, neuter, which five lack the vocative case. Unus lacketh the plural number, except it be joined with a word, that lacketh the singular, as unae literae, una maenia.

Singulariter

nominativo

unus, una, unum

Pluraliter

nominativo

uni, unae, una

genetivo

unius

genetivo

unorum, unarum, unorum

dativo

uni

dativo

unis

accusativo

unum, unam, unum

accusativo

unos, unas, una

vocativo

une, una, unum

vocativo

uni, unae, una

ablativo

uno, una, uno

ablativo

unis, and so the rest

 

Of Comparison

Comparison is whereby the signification of many adjectives is increased or deminished. There be two degrees of comparison after the absolute or positive.

The comparative somewhat exceedeth the positive in signification. And it either hath this English word “more” before it, or the syllable er in {n. p.} the end of it, as durior, “more hard, harder”.

The superlative exedeth the positive in the highest degree. And it hath either this English word “most” before it, or the syllable est in the end, as durissimus, “most hard, hardest”.

Comparison is perfect or defective.

Perfect comparison hath both degrees. It is regular, or irregular.

Regular is when the comparative and superlative are formed of the first case of the positive in i, that by putting to or and us, this by putting to s and simus, as duri, durior, durius, tristi, tristior, tristius, durissimus, tristissimus.

Irregular comparison departeth from this rule: bonus, melior, optimus, malus, peior, pessimus, parvus, minor, minimus. Multus plurimus, multa plurima, multum, plus, plurimum.

If the nominative of the positive endeth in er, the superlative is formed of it by putting to rimus, as pulcher, pulcherimus; inger ingerrimus; tener, tenerimus. But dextimus of dexter; maturimus and maturissimus of matur, unusuall.

These six in lis do form the superlative by changing lis into limus, as, facilis, agilis, gracilis, docilis, humilis, similis.

Compounds of dico, volo, facio, make entior and entissimus: maledicus, maledicentior, maledicentissimus; benevolus, benevolentior, benevolentissimus; magnificus, magnificentior, magnificentissimus.

To these add vetus, veterior, veterrimus; nequam, nequior, nequissimus; dives, divitior, ditissimus; frugi, frugalior, frugalissimus.

If a vowel come before us, it is compared by magis, and maxime, as pius, magis pius, maxime pius; assiduus, magis assiduus, maxime assiduus. {G}

 

Defective Comparison

ocyor, ocissimus, of ὠϰύς

sinister, sinisterior

potior, potissimus

iuvenis, iunior

inclytus, inclytissimus

senex, senior, maximus natu

opimus, opimor

ingens, ingentior

novus, novissimus, “new”

infinitus, infinitior

novissimus, “last”

satur, saturior

adolescens, adolescentior

assiduus, assiduior

more seldom”

meritus, meritissimus

strenuus, strenuior

 

These superlatives are very seldom used

egregissimus

perpetuissimus

mitificissimus

tuissimus

pientissimus and piissimus

exiguissimus, Ovid

ipsissimus

multissimus, Cicero

 

Of the Heteroclite

The heteroclite is redounding or defective.

These adjectives following, being of the double termination, redound in the nominative case, as campester, campestris, campestre; volucer, volucris, volucre; celeber, celebris, celebre; celer, celeris, celere; so saluber, pedester, equester, acer, paluster, alacer, sylvester; indecor, indecoris, indecore.

These following redound in termination.

Inermus, inermis; imbecillus, imbecillis; biiugus, biiugis; enervus, enervis; declivus, declivis; effraenus, effrenis; insonnis, insomnis; sublimus, sublimis; inanimus, inanimis; elumbus, elumbis; hilarus, hilaris.

These are defective in number, ambo, duo, tres, tria, mille, millia; ducenti, ducentae, ducenta; trecenti, trecentae, trecenta; caeteri; yet there is decaetero, but caeter, or caeterus is now utterly unusuall. Plaerique hath only the plural, and unus sometimes lacketh the singular. Likewise compounds of plus, as complures, “many”, used positively, and perplures, “very many”. {n. p.}

 

Of the Participle Adjective

The participle hath certain accidents of the adjective, viz., number, case, declension, gender. But the signification of a verb, it is gerundive or supinal.

The gerundive endeth in ans and ens, or in andus and endus, as, amans, docens, amandus, docendus.

The supinal endeth in rus or in tus, sus, xus, as amaturus, visurus, nexurus; amatus, visus, nexus; and one in uus, as, mortuus.

The gerundive in ans or ens is declined like faelix. But all the rest like bonus. Thus much of the real noun.

 

Of the Noun Personal

A noun personal signifieth one thing alone, with express difference of a certain person. It is therefore called a pronoun.

There be sixteen pronouns: ego, tu, sui, ille, ipse, iste, hic is, qui, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, nostras, vestras, to which is added the noun cuias.

These three, ego, tu, sui, are substantives, the rest are adjectives.

Furthermore, a pronoun is demonstrative or relative.

The demonstrative signifieth a person by showing or declaring it primarily: whereof there be eight, ego, tu, sui, ille, ipse, iste, his, is.

Ego signifieth or showeth himself, as ego scribo, therefore it is called the first person. {G2}

Tu showeth him to whom we speak, therefore it is called the second person, as tu scribis. And every vocative case is of this person: as,o Amarylli.

The other demonstratives show the thing whereof we speak, as ille scribit, therefore all manner of nouns, except ego and tu, are of the third person.

Sui with his derivative suus, showeth the person whereof we speak reciprocally, i.e. it hath respect or relation to the same thing that went before, as Petrus nimium admiratur se. Parcit erroribus suis.

Hic showeth him that is with me or next to me.

Iste showeth him that is with thee or next to thee, which we also use in speaking of a thing with contempt, as istum aemulum quoad poteris, ab ea pellito.

Ille showeth him that is apart from us both, which we also use in showing the eminence and excellence of a thing, as Alexander, ille magnus.

Ipse hath the signification of the three persons, as ipse vidi, ipse videris, ipse dixit. And it is joined to nouns and pronouns, as ipse ego, ipse ille, ipse Hercules. Likewise, ille ego, ille ipse, illo sannio.

Is showeth him that is far from us, and it also showeth a person or thing emphatically, as is esto, “it is even he”.

The relative maketh mention of, or rehearseth a thing that was showed before, whereof there be six, hic, ille, iste, is, idem, qui.

Idem signifieth “the same”, “the very same”, or “selfsame”, and it is joined to all persons, as, ego idem adsum. Tu idem has nuptias perge facere. Idem {n. p.} est vetus.

Qui is a pronoun infinite, having no certain difference of person, but may indifferently be joined to all persons.

When hic and ille have reference to two things aforegoing, hic is referred to the latter, and ille to the former most commonly, as agricolae contrarium est pastoris propositum: ille (agricola) quammaximo subacto et puro solo gaudet, hic (pastor) novali, graminosoque. But sometimes they are referred contrarily.

 

Of the Accidents of a Pronoun

Seven accidents befall a pronoun: kind, figure, number, case, declension, person.

 

Of Kind

Of pronouns, some are primitives, some derivatives.

Primitives are demonstratives and relatives. Derivatives are derived of the primitives.

Of derivatives some are possessives, some gentiles.

Possessives signify something as pertaining to the possessor. There be five possessives, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, which are derived of mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri.

Gentiles are so called because they signify pertaining to countries, nations, sects, or factions.

There be two gentiles, nostras and vestras, contracts of nostratis and vestratis, to which is added the interrogative cuies or cuiatis.

 

Of Figure

Figure is simple, as ego, or compounded, as egomet. {G3}

A pronoun is compounded of words or by apposition of syllables.

I. It is compounded with a substantive, as cuiusmodi, huiusmodi, eiusmodi, illiusmodi, istiusmodi.

II. With itself, and that in all cases or in some.

In all cases, as egoipse, tuipse, suiipsius.

In some case, as nominative istic, istaec, istoc vel istuc. Accusative istunc, istanc, istoc, vel istuc. Ablative istoc, istac, istoc. Plural istaec neuter, of iste, and hic. So illic, illaec, illoc vel illuc, etc., of ille and hic. So quisquis, quicquid, accusative quicquid, ablative quoquo, quaqua, quoquo.

III. With an adverb, as eccum, eccam, eccos, eccas, of ecce, and eum, ellum, ellam, ellos, ellas, of ecce, and illum. So idem, of is, and demum.

IIII. With conjunctions, as hiccine, hæccine, hoccine. Accusative hunccine, hanccine, hoccine, plural haeccine neuter.

V. With prepositions, as mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum, quibuscum.

These are compound with apposition of syllables whereof some are placed after the word, some before.

Met is set after ego, tu, sui, but the nominative of tu is excepted, and the genitive of sui.

Te is set after tu, and te, as tute, tete.

Ce is set after these obliques in s, huius, illius, istius, his, hos, illos, istos, has, illas, istas.

Pte is set after the ablative case of all possessives, as meopte, meapte, etc.

Dam, vis, liber, cunque, are set after qui, as quidam quivis, etc.

Nam, piam, putas, quam, que, are set after quis, as quisnam, quispiam, etc. {n. p.}

These are placed before the word: en, ne, alius, num, si, as ecquis, nequis, aliquis, nunquis, siquis, which in the feminine singular and neuter plural have qua, not quae, as siqua mulier, nequa flagitia.

 

Of Number and Case

Number and case are the same with the noun real.

 

Of Declension and Gender

Ego, tu, sui, are of the masculine gender when a man speaketh, but of the feminine when a woman speaketh. And they are of a peculiar manner of declining, as are also all demonstratives and relatives, as:

Singulatiter

nominativo

ego

Pluraliter

nominativo

nos

genitivo

mei

genetivo

nostrum, vel nostri

dativo

mihi

dativo

nobis

accusativo

me

accusativo

nos

vocativo caret

 

vocativo caret

 

ablativo

a me

ablativo

a nobis

 

Singulatiter

nominativo

tu

Pluraliter

nominativo

vos

genitivo

tui

genetivo

vestrum, vel vestri

dativo

tibi

dativo

vobis

accusativo

te

accusativo

vos

vocativo

o tu

vocativo

o vos

ablativo

a te

ablativo

a vobis

 

Singulariter

nominativo caret

accusativo se

and

genitivo sui

Vocativo caret

Pluraliter

dativo sibi

ablativo a se {G4}

 

Singulatiter

nominativo

iste, ista, istus

Pluraliter

nominativo

isti, istae, ista

genetivo

istius

genetivo

istorum, istarum, istorum

dativo

isti

dativo

istis

accusativo

istum ista, istud

accusativo

istos, istas, ista

vocativo caret

 

vocativo caret

 

ablativo

isto, ista, isto

ablativo

istis

 

So is illo declined, and also ipse, but in the neuter gender it maketh ipsum, not ipsud.

 

Singulatiter

Nominativo

hoc, haec, hoc

Pluraliter

nominativo

hi, hae, haec

genetivo

huius

genetivo

horum, harum, horum

dativo

huic

dativo

his

accusativo

hunc, hanc, hoc

accusativo

hos, has, haec

vocativo caret

 

vocativo caret

ablativo

hoc, hac, hoc

ablativo

his

 

Singulatiter

nominativo

is, ea, id

Pluraliter

nominativo

ii, eae, ea

genetivo

eius

genetivo

eorum, earum, eorum

dativo

ei

dativo

iis vel eis

accusativo

eum, eam, id

accusativo

eos, eas, ea

vocativo caret

 

vocativo caret

 

ablativo

eo, ea, eo

ablativo

iis vel eis

 

 

 

So idem, eadem, idem.

 

Singulatiter

nominativo

qui, quae, quos

Pluraliter

nominativo

qui, quae, quae

genetivo

cuius

genetivo

quorum, quarum, quorum

dativo

cui

dativo

quibus vel queis

accusativo

quem, quam, quod

accusativo

quos, quas, quae

vocativo caret

 

vocativo caret

 

ablativo

quo, qua, quo, vel qui

ablativo

quibus, vel queis

 

All possessives are declined like bonus, as meus, mea, meum, etc., and gentiles like tristis, as nostras and nostrate, genitive nostratis, etc. Tu, meus, noster, and nostras, have only the vocative case.

 

Of Person

There be three persons as is aforesaid: ego, {n. p.} tu, ille. And of the third person are all manner of nouns.

A noun is interpreted. The verb followeth.

 

Of a Verb

A verb is a part of speech that consignifieth a noun to express the manifold meaning of the mind.

In respect of the noun which it consignifieth, it is personal or impersonal.

A verb personal hath evermore some person joined with it, as ego amo, “I love”.

The impersonal hath no person, and therefore the sign “it” supplyeth the place thereof as oportet, “it behoveth”.

II. Division

In regard of signification only it is substantive or adjective.

A verb substantive signifieth the being of the person or thing, as sum, forem, fio, existo, exto.

The verb adjective signifieth some other thing from the being thereof. Therefore, all verbs except these five are adjectives.

III. Division

In regard of signification and voice a verb is active, passive, neuter, deponent, and common.

A verb a active endeth in o, and signifieth to do as amo, “I love”, and by putting to r it may be a passive, as amor.

A verb b passive endeth in r, and signifieth to suffer as amor, “I am loved”, and by taking away r it may be an active, as amo.

A verb neuter endeth in o or m, and cannot take r to make him a passive, as curro, sum. It {n. p.} signifieth sometimes actively, sometimes passively.

 

Of Neuters There Be Three Kindes

I. Some c signify action or doing complete and perfected in the verb itself without passing into an outward patient, as curro, ambulo, iaceo, dormio, pluit, ningit.

II. Some do signify d passion or suffering complete in the verb itself without receiving the same from an outward agent, as palleo, rubeo, albesco, nigresco, all which are neuters absolute.

III. Some besides these signify action or doing which passeth into a word of their own signification or a near signification, and therefore have the third person singular passive, and often the third plural, as aro, agrum, aratur, and arantur, agri; navigo, navigatur, and navigantur; so poto, pecco, nato, bibo, curro, vivo, etc. To these add all to which the figure prosopopoeia may be applied.

Where note that all neuters which cannot be made impersonals in the active voice are made impersonals in the passive voice, as curritur, studetur.

A verb deponent hath the passive voice but the signification of the active, as loquor verbum, or of the e neuter, as glorior.

A verb common hath the passive voice, and both active and passive signification, as, osculor te, osculor a te, so criminor, consolor, stipulor, speculor, adulor, frustor, dignor, testor, interpretor, amplector, meditor, experior, ementior, etc.

 

Note

I. Coming immediately before any word is a sign that it is a verb active deponent, or neuter transitive, as doceo, “I teach”, experior, “I try”. {n. p.} But “am”, “is”, “art”, “are”, “was”, “were”, “be”, “been”, are signs of the passive or neuter of the passive signification.

IIII. Division

In regard of construction a verb is transitive or intransitive.

Intransitive or absolute is any verb whose action alone, without any case after it, satisfieth a question made by quid agis? Or quid facis? As quid agis? Amo, “I love”, or “am in love”; quid facis? Scribo, “I write”, or “am writing”; disco, “I learn”, or “follow learning”, etc., which otherwise are transitives, as amo magistrum. Scribo epistulas.

Transitive is every verb whose action requireth some case of a noun, to absolve and perfect the same. It passeth immediatly into the accusative case, and mediately into others most comonly, as lego Virgilium, do tibi librum. Dedit mihi vestem pignori propria manu.

 

Of the Accidents of a Verb

Eight accidents befall a verb: kind, figure, mood, tense, person, number, conjugation, formation.

 

Of Kind

Kind is twofold. Primitive as ferveo. Derivative as fervesco.

 

Of Derivatives

There be five kinds of derivatives.

I. Meditatives or argumentatives, which signify the continuation, intention or increasing of the primitive, as labasco, calesco, edormisco, tumesco albesco, crudesco, sordesco, etc., which have the same signification with compounds of fio, which {n. p.} are wanting, as sordesco is the same that sordesio should be. And many of these are used for the primitive, as conticesco, adhaeresco, delitesco, concupisco, labasco, obdormisco, contremisco, expavesco, hisco, timesco, etc.

II. Frequentatives do end in to, so, xo, tor, as visito, affecto, scriptito, viso, quasso, nexo, texo, vexo, sector, scitor, sciscitor, and they signify a certain continuance or endeavour, as dicito, “I speak often”; viso, “I go to see”. To these add vellico, fodico, albico and such like, called commonly apparatives.

III. Desideratives do end in urio, as lecturio, parturio, esurio, caenaturio, canturio etc., “I purpose desire” or “am about to read”, etc.

IIII. Diminutives end in lo, or sso, as sorbillo, “to sipple”; cantillo, “to chirp”, “pipe”, orwhimper”; pitisso, “to bibble”, of sorbeo, canto, bibo.

V. Imitativesdo signify imitation or following, as patrisso, atticisso, platonisso, which being derived from the Greek are improper to the Latins, who rather use graecor, “to riot”; cornicor, “to chat”, or “cackle”; vulpinor, “to play the fox”; bacchor, “to swagger”, or “play the Devil”.

Some words seem to be derived of the Greek, as percello, of ϰέλλω; impleo, ϖλῶ; do, of δόω; plecto, of ϖλϰτω; reboo, of βοάω.

 

Of Figure

Figure is twofold, simple, as facio, compound, as calefacio. The affection of compound verbs is enallage.

 

Of Enallage {n. p.}

Enallage is when the first vowel of the present tense and perfect tense with all tenses formed thereof is changed into, e, i, or u.

I. Enallage of a into e

These verbs being compounded, damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, arceo, fatiscor, tracto, partio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo, pario, change a into e, as contemno, delecto, consecro, refello, etc., comperio and reperio of pario make comperi, and reperi in the preterperfect. The rest make perui, as aperui, operui. Compesco and dipesco of pasco make pescui in the preterperfect. The rest admit no change as epasco, epavi, etc.

II. Enallage of a, e, ae, into i

These verbs being compounded, habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo, pango, pegi, cano, quaero, caedo, tango, egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, rapio, change the first vowel of all tenses into i, as perhibio, perhibui, deliteo, delitui, etc., so concino, concinui, of cano; displiceo, displicui, except complaceo, and perplaceo. And depango, oppango, circumpango, repango, keep a still.

Praemineo, emineo, promineo, immineo of maneo, mansi, make minui in the preterperfect. Others follow the simple verb, as permaneo, remaneo, permansi, remansi, etc.

III. Enallage of a into u

These verbs, scaplo, calco, salto being compounded change a, into u, as exculpo, inculco, resulto. But claudo, quatio, lavo, lose a, as occludo, excludo; percutio, excutio; proluo, diluo.

Exception

These following change the first vowel of the present, but not of the preterperfect tense, into i, as {n. p.} ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango, capio, jacio, lacio, specio, premo, as redigo, redegi of ago, egi; resideo resedi of sedeo, sedi, etc.

But perago and satago admit no change. Dego and cogo lose a. Rego loseth the first syllable in pergo and surgo in the present tense.

Facio being compounded with a preposition changeth a into i, as inficio, dificio, etc., else not, as calfacio, terrifacio, benefacio.

Lego, being compounded with these prepositions, re, se, per, prae, sub, trans admitteth no change, as relego, selego, perlego, etc., otherwise it is changed as colligo, eligo, collegi, elegi, etc. But these three intelligo, diligo, negligo, make lexi, not legi in the preterperfect tense.

 

Note

There be many compounds whose simples are not in use, as defendo, offendo, aspicio, conspicio, adipiscor, experior, comperior, expedio, impedio, deleo, imbuo, compello, appello, incendo, accendo, ingruo, congruo, infligo, instigo, impleo, compleo, etc.

 

Of Mood

Mood is the diverse application of the verb to the thing which it consignifieth.

It is the same that case is in a noun.

It is finite or infinite.

A finite verb is determinate by number and person.

It is of unlike tenses or like tenses.

The finite of unlike tenses is the indicative and imperative.

The indicative mood showeth a reason true or false, as ego amo, “I love”, or asketh a question, as amas tu? “Dost thou love?”. {n. p.}

The imperative biddeth or commandeth, as ama, “love thou”.

The finite of like tenses is whose tenses are alike in all numbers and persons, it is absolute or subjunctive.

The absolute can absolve or perfect a tense by itself. It is optative or potential.

The optative wisheth or desireth and is known by these signs, would God, I pray, or God grant, and hath always an adverb of wishing joined with it, as utinam amem.

The potential is known by these signs, may, can, might, would, should, or ought, as, amem, “I may”, or “can love”. And it may stand without an adverb joined to it.

The subjunctive mood dependeth on another verb in the same sentence to perfect his signification. And it hath ever some conjunction joined with it, as cum amarem, eram miser.

The infinite mood is not determinate with number and person. And it hath commonly the sign to joined to it, as amare, “to love”.

 

Of Tense

Tense is the difference of a verb in regard of time.

There be five tenses or times.

I. The present tense speaketh of the time that now is, as amo, “I love”.

II. The preterimperfect tense speaketh of the time not altogether past, as amabam, “I loved”, or “did love”.

III. The preterperfect tense speaketh of the time fully past, as amavi, “I have loved”. It is known by {n. p.} the sign “have”.

IIII. The preterpluperfect tense speaketh of the time past long ago, as amaveram, “I had loved”. It is known by the sign “had”.

V. The future tense speaketh of the time to come, as amabo, “I shall”, or “will love”. It is known by the sign “shall”, orwill”.

 

Of Person

Person is threefold in both numbers, as hereafter appeareth.

 

Of Number

Number is twofold, as hereafter appeareth.

 

Of Conjugation

Conjugation is answearable to declension in a noun. Verbs in o have four conjugations which are thus known

The first conjugation hath ā long before re, and ris, as amāre, amāris.

The second hath ē long before re and ris, as docēre, docēris.

The third hath ĕ short before re and ris, as legĕre, legĕris.

The fourth hath ī long before re and ris, as audīre, audīris.

But the verb sum hath a peculiar manner of declining.

 

The Declining of the Verb Substantive Sum

 

Indicative Mood Singular {n. p.}

 

I. Sum, “I am”, es, est

Pluraliter

sumus, estis, sunt.

tus

II. Eram, “I was”, erat, erat

eramus, eratis, erant.

sus

III. Fui, “I have been”, fuisti, fuit

fuimus, fuistis, fuerunt vel ere

xus

IIII. Fueram, “I had been”, ras, rat

fueramus, fueratis, fuerant

 

V. Ero, “I shall”, or “will be”, eris, erit

erimus, eritis, erunt

 

Imperative Mood Present Tense

sis

 

sit

Pluraliter

 

sitis

sint

es

be thou”

esto

simus

este

sunto

esto

 

 

 

estote

 

 

Optative Mood Singular

 

I. Sim, “I pray God I be”, sis, sit

Pluraliter

simus, sitis, sint

tus

II. Essem, “would God I were”, ses, set

essemus, essetis, essent

sus

III. Fuerim, “I pray God I have been”, ris, rit

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

xus

IIII. Fuissem, “would God I had been”, fuisses, fuisset

fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent

 

V. Fuero, “God grant I be hereafter”, fueris, fuerit

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

Potential Mode Singular

 

I. Sim, “I may”, or “can be”, sis, sit

Pluraliter

simus, sitis, sint

tus

II. Essem, “I might”, or “could be”, esses, esset

essemus, essetis, essent

sus

III. Fuerim, “I might”, “could”, “should”, or “ought to have been”, fueris, fuerit.

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

xus

IIII. Fuissem, “I might”, “could”, “should”, or “ought to had been”, fuisses, fuisset

fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent

 

V. Fuero, “I may”, or “can be hereafter”, fueris, fuerit

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint {H}

 

Subjunctive Mood Singular, Cum

 

I. Sim, “when I am”, sis, sit

Pluraliter

simus, sitis, sint

tus

II. Essem, “when I was”, esses, esset

essemus, essetis, essent

sus

III. Fuerim, “when I have been”, fueris, fuerit

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

xus

IIII. Fuissem, “when I had been”, fuisses, fuisset

fuissemus, fuissetis, fuissent

 

V. Fuero, “when I shall”, or “will be”, fueris, fuerit

fuerimus, fueritis, fuerint

 

Infinitive Mood

I.

esse, “to be”

III.

fuisse, “to have” or “had been”

II.

 

IIII.

 

V.

fore, vel futurum esse, “to be hereafter”. Participle futurus

 

Note

These tenses supply the want of diverse tenses of verbs in or, name of the preterperfect tense of the indicative mood, and all tenses formed thereof, and are combined after this sort, after the supinals in tus, sus, xus, and uus, as hereafter followeth:

 

 

amor

amaris vel amare

amatus, amatus sum, vel amatus fui, amari

I. Coniugatio

amo, amas

 

amavi

amare, amandi, amando, amandum

 

amantus

 

amandus

 

 

amatum, amatu, amans, amaturus, “to love”, “to be loved” {n. p.}

 

 

doceor,

doceris, docere, doctus sum, doctus fui, doceri

II. Coniugatio

doceo, doces, docui, docere, docendi, docendo, docendum

 

doctus

 

docendus,

 

doctum, doctu, docens, docturus, “to teach”, “to be taught”

 

 

legor,

legeris, legere, lectus sum, lectus fui, legeri,

III. Coniugatio

lego, legis, legi, legere, legendi, legendo, legendum

 

lectus

 

Legendus

 

lectum, lectu, legens, lecturus, “to read”, “to be read”

 

 

audior,

audiris, audire, auditus sum, auditus fui, audiri

IIII. Coniugatio

audio, audis, audivi, audire, audiendi, audiendo, audiendum

 

auditus

 

audiendus

 

auditum, auditu, audiens auditurus, “to hear”, “to be heard”

 

Of Deponents and Commons

Deponents and commons are declined like the passive, saving that they have the gerunds, supines, and participles active also, as appeareth in the examples. But when deponents do not govern an accusative after them, they want the gerundive in dus.

 

Note

Dor and der are not used in the simple.

Neither for, nor fer, which cometh of for.

 

Here Followeth a Table of the Declining of Verbs {H2}

 

 

A Glass of Verbs

 

 

 

 

s

 

 

 

 

ndi, do, dum

rus

I. Coniugatio

o, as

avi

are

atum

 

 

 

s

 

 

 

 

ndi, do, dum

rus

II. Coniugatio

eo, es

ui

ere

Itum

 

A Table Whereby to Decline all Verbs

III. Coniugatio

bo, sit

co

do

go

ho

lo

mo

no

po, is

quo,is

ro, is

so

sco

to

vo

cio

dio

gio

pio

rio

tio

v-o

bi, sit

ci

di

xi

xi

ui, li

ui, mi

vi, ni

psi,   

qui, 

vi

sivi, si

vi

ti

vi

ci

dii

gi

pi

ri

ssi

ui

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ndi,

ere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

do,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

dum

tum

ctum

sum

ctum

ctum

itum, sum

itum, tum

tum

ptum, rus

tum, u

tum

tum, sum

tum

tum

tum

ctum

sum

ctum

tum

sum

ssum

itum

The exceptions of all conjugations are to

be found in the rules of formation

 Change o or io into ere, and it is the infinitive mood active. Change ere into i, and it is the infinite passive.

IIII. Coniugatio

 

 

s

 

 

 

 

 

endi, do, dum

rus

 

io, is

ivi

ire

itum

 

Note

That the preterperfect tense of every conjugation endeth like some one of the third, and hath the same supine accordingly. {n. p.}

 

 

Indicative Mood Present Tense Singular

I am loved”

thou are loved”

he is loved”

Pluraliter

we are loved”

ye are loved”

they are loved”

I love”

thou lovest

he loveth”

we love”

ye love”

they love”

amor

amaris vel amare

amatur

amamur

amamini

amantur

amo

amas

amat

amamus

amatis

amant

doceor

doceris,

docere

docetur

docemur

docemini

docentur

doceo,

doces,

docet

docemus

docetis

docent

legor

doceris

docere

legitur

legimur

legimini

leguntur

lego

legis

legit

legimus

legitis

legunt

audior

audiris

audire

auditur

audimur

audimini

audiuntur

audio

audis

audit

audimus

auditis

audiunt

 

 

amabar

 

I was loved”

 

Preterimperfect

amabam

 

I loved”, or “did love”

docebar

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

 

docebam

bas,

bat. Pluraliter bamus,

batis,

bant

legebar

 

 

 

 

legebam

 

 

 

 

audiebar

 

 

 

 

audiebam

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus sum vel fui

 

Preterperfect

amavi

 

 

I have been loved”

doctus sum vel fui

 

I have loved”

 

docui

sti, it.

Pluraliter imus, istis, erunt vel ere

lectus sum vel fui

 

 

 

legi

 

 

 

auditus sum vel fui

 

 

 

audivi

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus eram vel fueram

 

 

Preterpluperfect

amaveram

 

 

I had been loved”

doctus eram vel fueram

 

I had loved”

docueram

ras, rat.

Pluraliter ramus, ratis, rant

lectus eram vel fueram

 

 

legeram

 

 

auditus eram, vel fueram

 

 

audiveram

 

 

{H3}

 

 

amabor

 

I will be loved”

 

Future

amabo

 

I shall” or “will love”

docebor

eris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

docebo

bis,

bit. Pluraliter bimus,

bitis,

bunt

legar

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

legam,

es,

et. Pluraliter emus,

etis,

ent,

audiar

 

 

 

 

audiam

 

 

 

 

 

Imperative Mood, Present Tense Singular

be thou loved”, “let him be loved”

love thou”, “let him love”

let be loved”

be ye loved”

let them be loved”

let us love”

love ye”

love they”

 

amare

 

amatur

 

 

amemur

amamini

amentur

 

 

ama

amet

Pluraliter amemus,

amate,

ament

 

amator

 

amator

 

 

amaminor

amantor

 

 

amato

amato

 

amatote

amanto.

 

 

docere

 

doceatur

doceamur

docemini

 

doceantur

 

 

doce

doceat

Pluraliter doceamus,

docete,

doceant

 

docetor

 

docetor

 

 

minor

 

docentor

 

 

doceto

doceto

 

docetote

docento

 

 

legere

 

legatur

 

 

legamur

legimini

 

legantur

 

 

lege

legat

Pluraliter legamus,

legite,

leganto

 

legitor

 

legitor

 

 

legiminor

 

leguntor

 

 

legito

legito

 

legitote

legunto

 

 

audire

 

audiur

 

 

audiamur

audimini

 

audiantur

 

 

audi

audiat

Pluraliter audiamus,

audite,

audiant

 

auditor

 

auditor

 

 

audiminor

 

audiuntur

 

 

audito

audito

 

auditote

audiunto

 

 

Optative Mood Present Tense Singular, utinam {n. p.}

 

 

God grant I be loved”

 

 

 

 

 

God grant I love”

 

amer

ameris, amere

ametur

amemur

amemini

amentur

 

amem

ames

amet

Pluraliter amemus,

ametis,

ament

 

docear

 

 

 

 

 

 

doceam

 

 

 

 

 

 

legar

ris, re,

ur,

r,

mini,

ur

 

legam

as,

at,

Pluraliter amus,

atis,

ant

 

audiar

 

 

 

 

 

 

audam

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

amarer

 

 

would God I were loved”

 

Preterimperfect

amarem,

 

would God I loved”, or “did love”

 

docerer

ris, re,

ur,

r,

mini,

ur

 

docerem

res,

ret,

Pluraliter remus,

retis,

rent

 

legerer

 

 

 

 

 

 

legerem

 

 

 

 

 

 

audirer

 

 

 

 

 

 

audirem

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preterperfect

amatus sim, fuerim

 

I pray God I have been loved”

amaverim

 

I pray God I have loved”

doctus sim, fuerim

 

 

ti,

 

 

docuerim

ris,

rit.

Pluraliter rimus,

itis,

rint

lectus sim, fuerim

 

 

 

 

 

legerim

 

 

 

 

 

 

auditus sim, fuerim

 

 

 

 

 

 

audiverim

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preterpluperfect

amatus essem, fuissem

 

would God I had been loved”

amavissem

 

would God I had loved”

doctus essem, fuissem

 

 

ri

 

 

docuissem

ses,

set.

Pluraliter semus,

setis,

sent

lectus essem, fuissem

 

 

 

 

 

legissem

 

 

 

 

 

auditus essem, fuissem

 

 

 

 

 

audivissem

 

 

 

 

 

{H4}

 

Future tense

amatus ero, fuero

 

God grand I be loved hereafter”

amavero,

 

God grant I loved hereafter”

doctus ero, fuero

 

 

ti,

 

 

docuero,

ris,

rit.

Pluraliter rimus,

ritis,

rint

lectus ero, fuero

 

 

 

 

 

legero,

 

 

 

 

 

auditus ero, fuero

 

 

 

 

 

audivero,

 

 

 

 

 

 

Potential Mood Present Tense Singular

 

 

I may be loved”

 

 

 

 

I may”, or “can love”

amer

ameris, amere

amer

amemur

amemmini

amemur

amem,

ames,

amet.

Pluraliter amemus,

ametis,

ament,

docear

 

 

 

 

 

doceam

 

 

 

 

 

legar

ris, vel re,

ur,

r,

mini,

ur,

legam

as,

at.

Plural amus,

atis,

ant

audiar

 

 

 

 

 

audiam

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

amarer

 

 

be loved”

Preterimperfect

amarem

 

I might”, “would”, “should”, “ought”, or “could love”

docerer

ris, re,

ur,

r,

mini,

ur,

docerem

res,

ret. Plural remus,

retis,

rent

legerer

 

 

 

 

legerem

 

 

 

 

audirer

 

 

 

 

audirem

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus sim, fuerim

 

 

“to have been loved”

Preterperfect

amaverim,

 

“I might”, “would”, “should”, or “ought to have loved”

doctus sim, fuerim

 

 

ti

 

docerim,

ris,

rit. Pluraliter rimus,

ritis,

rint

lectus sim, fuerim

 

 

 

 

legerim

 

 

 

auditus sim, vel fuerim

 

 

 

audiverim

 

 

 


{n. p.}

 

 

amatus essem, fuissem

 

 

to had been loved”

Preterpluperfect

amavissem

 

I might”, “would”, “should”, or “ought to had loved”

doctus essem, fuissem

 

ti

 

 

 

docuissem

ses,

set. Pluraliter semus,

setis

sent

 

lectus essem, fuissem

 

 

 

 

 

legissem

 

 

 

auditus essem, fuissem

 

 

 

audivissem

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus ero, fuero

 

 

“be loved hereafter”

Future tense

amavero

 

“I may” or “can love hereafter”

doctus ero, fuero

 

 

ti

 

 

docuero

ris,

rit. Pluraliter rimus,

ritis,

rint

lectus ero, fuero

 

 

 

legero

 

 

auditus ero, fuero

 

audivero

 

 

Subjunctive Mood present tense singular, cum.

 

 

when I am loved”

 

 

when I love”

amer

ameris, amere

ametur

amemur

amemini

amentur

amem

ames,

amet.

Pluraliter amemus,

ametis,

ament

docear

 

 

 

 

 

doceam

 

 

 

 

 

legar

ris re,

ur

r

mini

ur

legam

as,

at.

Pluraliter amus,

atis,

ant

audiar

 

 

 

 

 

audiam

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

amarer

 

when I was loved”

Preterimperfect

amarem,

 

when I loved”, or “did love”

docear

ris, re

ur

r

mini

ur

doceam,

res,

ret. Pluraliter remus,

retis,

rent

legerer

 

 

 

 

legerem

 

 

 

 

audirer

 

 

 

 

audirem

 

 

 

 

{n. p.}

 

 

amatus sim, fuerim

when I have been”

 

Preterperfect

amaverim,

 

when I have loved”

 

doctus sim, fuerim

ti

docuerim

ris,

rit. Pluraliter rimus,

ritis,

rint

 

lectus sim, fuerim

 

 

legerim

 

 

 

 

auditus sim, fuerim

 

 

audiverim

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus essem, fuissem

when I had been loved”

Preterpluperfect

amavissem

 

when I had loved”

doctus essem, fuissem

ti

 

 

docuissem

ses,

set. Pluraliter semus,

setis,

sent

lectus essem, fuissem

 

 

 

legissem

 

 

 

 

auditus essem, fuissem

 

audivissem

 

 

 

 

 

 

amatus ero, fuero

when I shall”, or “will be loved”

Future tense

amavero

 

when I shall” or “will love”

doctus ero, fuero

 

ti

 

 

docuero

ris,

rit. Pluraliter rimus,

ritis,

rint

lectus ero, fuero

 

 

 

 

legero

 

 

 

 

auditus ero, fuero

 

 

 

 

 

audivero

 

 

 

 

 

Of the Verb Infinite

The verb infinite is not determinate by number and person.

It is absolute or participial.

The infinitive absolute hath a double termination re of the present tense and preterimperfect tense, and isse of the preterperfect and preterpluperfect tense. {n. p.}

 

Present and preterimperfect

amari

 

Preterperfect and preterpluperfect

amatum esse, fuisse

 

amare

 

amavisse

 

doceri

 

doctum esse, fuisse

 

docere

to be loved”

docuisse,

to have”, or

legeri

to love”

lectum esse, fuisse

had been loved”

legere

 

legisse

had loved”

audiri

 

auditum esse, fuisse

 

audire

 

audivisse

 

 

Of the Participle Substantive

A verb participle hath certain properties of a noun, but the signification of a verb.

It is a participle substantive or a participle adjective.

The participle substantive is a gerund or a supine.

 

Of the Gerund

The gerund hath three terminations, di, do, dum, whereof di and do are the present tense and preter tense, and dum is of the future tense with a certain instant motion. And they signify most commonly actively and sometimes passively, as:

 

being loved”

 

being loved”

 

be loved”

amandi

of loving”

amando

in loving”

amandum

to love”

docendi

of teaching”

docendo

in teaching”

docendum

to teach”

legendi

of reading”

legendo

in reading”

legendum

to read”

audiendi

of hearing”

audiendo

in hearing”

audiendum

to hear”

 

Of the Supine

The supine hath two terminations, the one in um, the other in u.

The supine in um is of the future tense with a certain instant motion, and signifieth actively, as: {n. p.}

Future tense

amatum

to love”

 

doctum

to teach”

 

lectum

to read”

auditum

to hear”

This supine is sometimes expressed by the verb ire, an active, and iri, a passive, as:

amatum ire

to love”

 

amatum iri

to be loved”

 

doctum ire

to teach”

hereafter

doctum iri

to be taught”

hereafter

lectum ire

to read”

 

lectum iri

to be read”

 

auditum ire

to hear”

 

auditum iri

to be heard”

 

 

The Supine in u is of the present tense and preter tense, and signifieth passively, as:

amatu

to be loved”

doctu

to be taught”

lectu

to be read”

auditu

to be heard”

 

Of the Participle Adjective

The participle adjective is gerundive or supinal.

The gerundive is derived of the gerund. There be two gerundives, one of the present tense, and another of the future tense.

The gerundive of the present tense hath his Latin ending in ans or in ens, and his English in “ing”, and it signifieth actively, as:

Present tense

amans

loving”

impersonals have no participles except paenitans, decens, libens, pertaesus, paenidendus, pudendus

docens

teaching”

legens

reading”

audiens

hearing”

A gerund of the future tense hath his Latin ending in andus or endus, and signifieth passively, as {n. p.}

Future tense

amandus

 

loved”

 

docendus

to be”

taught”

hereafter

legendus

 

read”

 

audiendus

 

heard”

 

The third sort of neuters having the third person plural, have this tense, as aranda terra.

This gerundive is used absolutely with esse, as

Future tense

amandum esse

 

loved”

 

docendum esse

to be”

taught”

hereafter

legendum esse

 

read”

 

audiendum esse

 

heard”

 

 

Of the Supinal

The supinal is made of the supine. There be two supinals, one of the future tense, another of the preter tense.

A supinal of the future tense hath his Latin ending in rus, and signifieth actively like his supine, as:

Future temse

amaturus, “to love” or “about to love”

docturus, “to teach” or “about to teach”

lecturus, “to read” or “about to read”

auditurus, “to hear” or “about to hear”

It is used also absolutely with esse, as:

Future tense

amaturum esse

to love”

 

docturum esse

to teach”

hereafter

lecturum esse

to read”

 

auditurum esse

to hear”

 

The supinal of the preter tense hath his Latin ending in tus, sus, xus, as amatus, visus, nexus, and his English in “d”, “t”, “n”, as “loved”, “taught”, “slain”. But one endeth in uus, as mortuus. Example: {n. p.}

Preter tense

amatus

loved”

The third kind of neuters aforesaid have this tense, as arata terra.

doctus

taught”

lectus

read”

auditus

heard”

It is used absolutely with esse and fuisse, as

amatum esse, vel fuisse

 

loved”

doctum esse, vel fuisse

“to have”, or “had been”

taught”

lectum esse, vel fuisse

 

read”

auditum esse, vel fuisse

 

heard”

 

Anomaly of Conjugation

These seven verbs following, possum, volo, nolo, malo, edo, fio, fero with his passive feror, do not altogether follow the rule of conjugation, which are thus declined:

Possum, potes, potui, posse, potens, “to may” or “can”.

Volo, vis, volui, velle; volendi, volendo, volendum; supinis caret, volens, “to will” or “to be willing”.

Nolo, non vis, nolui, nolle; nolendi, nolendo, nolendum; supinis caret, nolens, “to nill” or “to be unwilling”.

Malo, mavis, malui, malle; malendi, malendo, malendum; supinis caret, malens, “to have rather”, or “to be more willing”.

Edo, edis vel es, edi, edere vel esse; edendi, edendo, edendum; esum, esu, vel estum, estu; edens, esurus vel esturus, “to eat”.

Fio, fis, factus sum vel fui, fieri; factus, faciendus, “to be made” or “done”.

Fero, fers, tuli, ferre; ferendi, ferendo, ferendum; latum, latu; ferens, laturus, “to bear” or “suffer”.

Feror, ferris vel ferre, latus sum vel fui, ferri; latus, ferendus, “to be born” or “suffered”. {n. p.}

 

Indicative Mood

Present tense, singular

possum, potes, potest

Pluraliter

possumus, potestis, possunt

volo, vis, vult

volumus, vultis, volunt

nolo, non vis, non vult

nolumus, non vultis, nolunt.

malo, mavis, mavult

malumus, mavultis, malunt

edo, edis vel es, edit vel est.

edimus, editis vel estis, edunt

fio, fis, fit

fimus, fitis, fiunt

fero, fers, fert

ferimus, fertis, ferunt

feror, ferris, vel re, fertur

ferimur, ferimini, feruntur

 

Preterimperfect singular

poteram

 

volebam

 

nolebam

 

malebam

as, at. Pluraliter, amus, atis, ant

edebam

 

fiebam

 

ferebam

 

ferebar, ferebaris vel ferebare, ferebatur. Pluraliter ferebamur, ferebamini, ferebantus

 

 

Preterperfect

potui

malui

 

volui

edi

isti, it. Pluraliter imus, istis, erunt vel ere

nolui

tuli

 

 

 

 

factus

sum vel fui, etc.

latus

 

 

 

Praeterpluperfect

potueram

malueram

 

volueram

ederam

ras, rat. Pluraliter ramus, ratis, rant

nolueram

tuleram

 

 

 

 

factus

eram vel fueram, etc.

latus

 

 

{n. p.}

 

potero, poteris, poterit. Pluraliter erimus, eritis, erint

volam

edam

 

nolam

fiam

es, et. Pluraliter emus, etis, ent

malam

feram

 

ferar, fereris, vel ferere. Pluraliter feremur, feremini, ferentur

Possum, volo, malo, want the imperative mood.

 

Imperative Mood

Present tense singular

noli, nolito. Pluraliter, nolite, nolitote

es, esto

edat

 

edite, este

edant

ede, edito

esto

pluraliter edamus

estote

edunto

 

edito

 

editote

 

fito, fictu

fiat

pluraliter fiamus

fite

fiant

 

fito

 

fitote

fiunto

fer

ferat

pluraliter feramus

ferte

ferant

ferto

ferto

 

fertote

ferunto

ferre

feratur

pluraliter feramur

ferimini

ferantur

ferror

fertor

 

feriminor

feruntor

 

Optative Mood, Utinam

Present tense

possim

nolim

is, it. Pluraliter imus, itis, int

velim

malim

 

edam

 

 

fiam

as, at. Pluraliter amus, atis, ant

feram

 

 

ferar, feraris vel ferare, feratur. Pluraliter feramur, feramini, ferantur

 

Preterimperfect

possem

ederem

 

vellem

vel essem

es, et. Pluraliter emus, etis, ent

nollem

fierem

 

mallem

ferrem

 

ferer, fereris vel fere, feretur. Pluraliter feremur, feremini, ferentur

{n. p.}

Preterperfect

potuerim

maluerim

 

voluerim

ederim

ris, rit. Pluraliter rimus, ritis, rint.

noluerim

tulerim

 

 

 

 

factus

sim vel fuerim, etc.

latus

 

Preterpluperfect

potuissem

maluissem

 

voluissem

edissem

ses, set. Pluraliter semus, setis, sent

noluissem

tulissem

 

 

 

 

factus

essem vel fuissem, etc.

latus

 

Future tense

potuero

maluero

 

voluero

edero

ris, rit. Pluraliter rimus, ritis, rint

noluero

tulero

 

 

 

 

factus

ero vel fuero, etc., and so of the potential and subjunctive as aforesaid

latus

 

Infinitive Mood

Present tense

posse

preterperfect and preterpluperfect tense

potuisse

 

 

 

velle

voluisse

 

 

 

nolle

noluisse

 

 

 

malle

maluisse

 

 

 

edere vel esse

edisse

Future

esurum

esse

ferre

tulisse

 

laturum

 

fieri

 

factum esse vel fuisse

 

ferri

 

latum esse vel fuisse

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

future tense

factum iri, vel faciendum esse

 

 

 

latum iri, vel ferendum esse

 

{I}

 

Of Formation

Formation is whereby all the tenses of every mood are formed of the second or first person of the present tense of the indicative mood.

 

First Conjugation

 

 

ama-bam, amabar

 

 

 

 

ama-bo, amabor

 

 

Of the present tense ama-s is formed the

Imperative mood ama, whereof are formed

am-em, amer

 

 

ama-rem, amarer

 

 

ama-re, amari

 

 

 

amans

 

 

ama-ndi

whereof amans, by changing di into s

ama-ndo

 

amandus

 

 

ama-ndum, whereof amandus, whereof amandum esse.

 

 

 

 

 

amav-eram

 

 

 

amav-erim

 

 

Preterperfect tense by changing s into vi, as amavi, whereof are formed

amavi-ssem

 

 

amav-ero

 

 

amavi-sse

 

 

ama-tum, whereof

amatum

ire

 

 

iri

 

amaturus, whereof

 

 

 

amaturum esse

 

 

 

amatus sum vel fui

 

 

 

amatu, whereof amatus, and

amatus eram vel fueram

 

 

 

amatus sim vel fuerim

 

 

 

 

amatus essem vel fuissem

 

 

 

 

amatus ero vel fuero

 

 

 

 

amatum esse vel fuisse

 

In the preterperfect tense of this conjugation sixteen verbs are irregular, namely {n. p.} iuvo, iuvi; nexo, nexui; seco, secui; neco, necui and necavi; mico, micui and dimicavi; plico, plicui; frico, fricui; domo, domui; tono, tonui; sono, sonui; crepo, crepui, but increpavi and discrepavi; veto, vetui, perfect vetavi; cubo, cubui; do, dedi; sto, steti.

Deponents in this conjugation are regular.

 

Second Conjugation

 

 

habe-bam, habebar

 

 

 

 

habe-bo, habebor

 

 

Of the present tense habes is formed the

Imperative mood habe, whereof are formed

habe-am, habear

 

 

habe-rem, haberer

 

 

habe-re, haberi

 

 

 

habens

 

 

habe-ndi

whereof habens, by changing di into s

habe-ndo

 

habendus

 

 

habe-ndum, whereof habendus by changing m into s, whereof habendum esse

 

 

 

 

 

habueram

 

 

 

habu-erim

 

 

Preterperfect tense by changing s into vi, as amavi, whereof are formed

habui-ssem

 

 

habu-ero

 

 

abui-sse

 

 

 

habitum

ire

habitum, whereof

 

iri

 

habiturus and habiturum esse

 

 

habitu whereof habitus

sum vel fui

 

 

 

eram vel fueram

 

 

 

 

sim vel fuerim

 

 

 

essem vel fuissem

 

 

 

 

ero vel fuero

 

 

 

 

habitum esse vel fuisse

 

{I2}

In the preterperfect tense of this conjugation many verbs are irregular.

 

beo

iubeo, iussi; sorbeo, sorbui, and sorpsi

 

ceo

luceo, luxi; polluceo, polluxi; mulceo, mulsi

 

deo

suadeo, suasi; rideo, ardeo, si; video, vidi; sedeo, sedi

 

 

mordeo, momordi; tondeo, totondi; spondeo, spopondi; pendeo, pependi; which four double the first syllable of the present tense in the preterimperfect. Prandeo, prandi. But gaudeo, gavisus sum; audeo, ausus sum, neuter passives

In

geo

fulgeo, fulsi; tergeo, turgeo, urgeo, algeo, si; mulgeo, mulsi and mulxi; indulgeo, indulsi; augeo, auxi; lugeo, luxi; frigeo, frixi

 

leo

pleo, plevi; neo, nevi; fleo, flevi; leo, deleo, levi; oleo, olevi; soleo, solitus sum; neuter passives.

 

neo

maneo, mansi; but, promineo, emineo, praemineo, immineo, ui

 

queo

torqueo, torsi; liqueo, licui

 

reo

haereo, haesi; mereo, merui. But maereo, maestus, neuter passives

 

veo

caveo, cavi; faveo, foveo, moveo, voveo, paveo, vi; ferveo, ferbui. And vi, of ferbeo, and fervo; pingueo, pingui; niveo and conniveo, pinguivi and connixi; cieo, civi; vieo, vievi

Deponents in this conjugation usually make itus, as liceor, licitus; tueor, tuitus. But misereor, miseritus and misertus; fateor, fassus; confiteor, profiteor, diffiteor, fessus, reor, ratus.

 

Third Conjugation {n. p.}

 

 

 

 

lege-bam, legebar

 

 

 

 

leg-am, legar. Future tense

 

 

Imperative mood

by changing o

into e, whereof

are formed

lega-m, legar. Present optative potential subjunctive

 

 

lege-rem, legerer

 

 

lege-re, legi. Ere, or e, into i

 

 

 

 

 

lege-ndi

 

 

 

 

legendo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

lege-ndum. Whereof legendus, whereof legendum esse

Of these last syllables of the present tense are formed

bo

 

bi

 

 

tum

 

co

 

ci

 

 

ctum

 

do

 

di

 

 

sum

 

go

 

xi

 

 

ctum

 

ho

 

xi

 

leg-eram

ctum

 

lo

 

ui, li

 

leg-erim

itum, sum

 

mo

 

ui, mi

 

legi-ssem

itum, tum

 

no

 

vi, ni

 

leg-ero

tum

 

um

po

 

psi

whereof are formed

legi-sse, and

ptum

whereof

 

quo

preterperfect by changing these last syllables into

qui

so of all the

tum

urus

ro

vi

rest

tum

urum

so

sivi, si

 

tum, sum

 

esse

sco

vi

 

tum

 

to

ti

 

tum

 

vo

 

vi

 

tum

 

cio

 

ci

 

 

ctum

 

 

dio

 

di

 

 

sum

ctum

 

 

gio

 

gi

 

 

tum

 

 

pio

 

pi

 

supines by changing these last syllables into

sum

 

 

rio

 

ri

 

sum

sum vel fui

 

tio

 

ssi

 

itum

eram vel fueram

 

uo

 

ui

 

 

sim vel fueram

 

 

 

 

 

u: whereof comes us

esseem vel fuissem

 

 

 

 

 

ero vel fuero

 

 

 

 

 

um esse vel fuisse

{I3}

Note

The preterperfect tense of every conjugation endeth in one of these terminations, bi, ci, di, etc., whereof the supine is formed. Therefore to know the supines of any conjugation, look here for the termination of the preterperfect tense; and it showeth the supine over against it, unless it be excepted as hereafter followeth.

 

I. Anomaly of the Imperative Mood

In the formation of the imperative mood of this conjugation those verbs that end in cio, dio, gio, pio, rio, tio, are irregular, for in the imperative mood they lose i, as iacio, iace. In the imperfect tense they keep it, as faciebam, so in the future tense and in the present tense of the optative potential subjunctive imitating the fourth conjugation.

 

II. Anomaly of the Preterperfect Tense

bo, bi

lambo, lambi. But scribo, scripsi; nubo nupsi; cumbo, cubui

co, ci

vinco, vici. But parco, peperci and parsi; dico, dixi; duco, duxi

do, di

mando, mandi. But scindo, scidi; findo, fidi; fundo, fudi; tundo, tutudi; pendo, pependi; tendo, tetendi; pedo, pepedi; cado, cecidi; caedo, cecidi. Cedo, cessi, “to depart”, or “give place”. And these following change do into si, as vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo, claudo, plaudo, rodo. But fio, fisus sum, neuter passive

go, xi

iungo, iunxi. But go before r is turned into si, spargo, sparsi; lego, legi; ago, egi; tango, {n. p.} tetigi; pungo, punxi and pupugi; frango, fregi; pango, pepigi, “to bargain”; pegi, “to join”; panxi, “to sing”

ho, xi

traho, traxi; veho, vexi. Regular

lo, ui.

colo, colui. But psallo, psalli; sallo, salli; vello velli, vulsi; fallo, fefelli; cello, “to break”, ceculi; pello, pepuli.

mo, ui.

vomo, vomui. But emo, emi; como, compsi; promo, prompsi; demo, dempsi; sumo, sumpsi; premo, pressi

no, vi

sino, sivi. But temno, tempsi; sterno, stravi; lino, lini, livi, levi; cerno, crevi; gigno, genui; pono, posui; cano, cecini

po, psi

scalpo, scalpsi. But rumpo, rupui; stripo, strupui; crepo, crepui

quo, qui

linquo, liqui. But coquo, coxi

ro, vi

sero, sevi, “to plant”, or “sow”. But sero, serui; “to approach too”, or “to lay in order”; verro, verri, and versi; uro, ussi; gero, gessi; quaero, quaesivi; tero, trivi; curro, cucurri

so, sivi

arcerso, arcesso, incesso, lacesso. But capesso, capessi, and capessivi; facesso, facessi; viso, visi; pinso, pinsui

sco, vi

pasco, pavi. But posco, poposci; disco, didici; quinisco, quexi.

to, ti

verto, ti. But sisto, stiti, “to make to stand”; sterto, stertui; meto, messui; flecto, flexi; pecto, pexui, pexi; necto, nexui, nexi; mitto, misi; peto, petii, petivi

vo, vi

volvo, volvi. But vivo, vixi; nexo, nexui; texo, texui

cio, ci

facio, feci; iacio, ieci. But lacio, lexi; specio, spexi

dio, di

fodio, fodi. Gio, gi, as fugio, fugi. Pio, pi, as capio, cepi; cupio, cupivi; rapio, rapui; sapio, {I4} sapui and sapivi

rio, ri

pario, peperi. Tio, ssi, as quatio, quassi

uo, ui

statuo, statui. But pluo, plui and pluvi; struo, struxi; fluo, fluxi

Deponents irregular. Labor, lapsus; gradior, gressus; patior, passus; apiscor, aptus; adipiscor, adeptus; amplector, amplexus; comminiscor, commentus; defatiscor, defessus; expergiscor, experrectus; irascor, iratus; nascor, natus; nanciscor, nactus; obliviscor, oblitus; paciscor, pactus; ulciscor, ultus; fungor, functus; loquor, locutus; sequor, secutus; quaeror, quaestus; revertor, reversus; nitor, nisus and nixus; utor, usus; fruor, fruitus, and fructus, whereof cometh fretus; ringor, rictus; orior, ortus; morior, mortuus; tuor and tueor, tuitus.

 

IIII. Conjugation

 

 

audi-ebam, audiebar. But ibam, quibam, of eo and queo

 

 

audi-am, audiar. But ibo, quibo

 

Of the present tense audi-s is formed the

Imperative mood audi,

whereof are

formed

audi-am, audiar. Present optative potential subjunctive

audi-rem, audirer

 

audi-re, audiri

 

 

 

audiens

 

 

audi-endi, whereof audiens

 

 

audi-endo

 

 

audi-endum, whereof audiendus, and of that audiendum esse

 

 

but eundi, queundi, queundo, queundum

 

 

 

 

audiv-eram

 

Preterperfect by changing

s into vi, as audivi

audiv-erim

 

audivi-ssem

 

 

 

audiv-ero

 

 

 

audivi-sse {n. p.}

 

 

 

 

 

 

whereof are formed

auditum, whereof

auditum

ire

 

 

 

iri

 

 

auditurus, and auditurum esse

 

 

auditu, whereof auditus and

auditus sum vel fui

auditus eram vel fueram

 

 

 

auditus sim vel fuerim

 

 

 

auditus essem vel fuissem

 

 

 

auditus ero vel fuero

 

 

 

auditum esse vel fuisse

In the preterperfect tense of this conjugation, thirteen verbs are commonly irregular. Venio, veni; cambio, campsi; raucio, rauci; farcio, farci; sepio, sepsi; sentio, sensi; fulcio, fulsi; haurio, hausi; sancio, sanxi; vincio, vinxi; salio, salui, “to leap”; amicio, amicui. These are seldom regular. But venio never maketh venivi. Deponents irregular are, metior, mensus; orior, ortus.

 

Of the Compound Preterperfect Tense

In the compound preterperfect tense, these are irregular.

I. Simple verbs that* double the first syllable of the present tense in the preterperfect tense do not so in the compound, as tetendi, contendi. Cello, ceculi; perculi and perculsi. Except praecurro, excurro, repungo. And compounds of do, disco, sto, posco.

II. Plico, being compounded with sub or a noun, formeth plicavi, as supplico, multiplico, duplico, triplico, etc. But applico, complico, replico, explico, ui and avi. Lacio; elicui; insero, inserui, insevi.

III. Oleo, olui formeth olevi, as exoleo, exolevi. {n. p.} But adolevi and adolui; redolevi and redolui; obolevi and obolui; subolevi and subolui;. All compounds of pungo form punxi, but, repungo, repunxi, and repupugi.

IIII. Compounds of do of the third conjugation make didi, as addo, credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, obdo, condo, indo, trado, vendo; and the compounds of sto make stiti.

 

III. Anomaly of the Supine

bi, tum

bibi, bibitum, regular

ci, ctum

feci, factum; jeci, jactum; ici, ictum, regular

di, sum.

vidi, visum. But these double s: pandi, passum; sedi, sessum; scidi, scissum; fidi, fissum; fodi, fossum; dedi, datum

note that the doubled syllable of the preterperfect is not doubled in the supine, as tetendi, tensum, and tentum

gi, ctum.

legi, lectum. But pegi, and pepigi, pactum; fregi, fractum; tetegi, tactum; egi, actum; pupugi, punctum; fugi, fugitum

li, sum

salli, salsum; pepuli, pulsum; ceculi, culsum; fefelli, falsum; tuli, latum

mi, ni

pi, qui, tum, as emi, emptum; veni, ventum; cecini, cantum; capi, captum of capio, but caeptum of caepio; rupi, ruptum; liqui, lictum

ri, sum

verri, versum. But peperi, partum

si, sum.

visi, visum. Some double s, as misi, missum; but fulsi, fultum; hausi, haustum; sarsi, sartum; farsi, fartum. And these also ussi, ustum; gessi, gestum; torsi, tortum, and torsum; indulsi, indultum, and indulsum {n. p.}

psi, ptum

scripsi, scriptum. But campsi, campsum

ti, tum

steti, statum of sto; stiti, statum of sisto. But verti, versum

vi, tum.

flavi, flatum. But pavi, pastum; lavi, lotum; lautum, lavatum; potavi, potum, potatum; favi, fatum; cavi, cautum; sevi, satum; livi and lini, litum; solvi, solutum; volvi, volutum; singultivi, singultum; vaenivi, vaenum; sepelivi, sepultum; adolevi, adultum; sobolavi, subolitum; but exolevi, exoletum

ui, itum.

domui, domitum. But ui, of uo, formeth utum, as erui, erutum. But rui, ruitum; secui, sectum; necui, nectum; fricui, frictum; miscui, mistum; amicui, amictum; torrui, tostum; docui, doctum; tenui, tentum; consului, consultum; alui, altum, alitum; salui, saltum; colui, and occului, cultum; pinsui, pistum; rapui, raptum; serui, sertum; texui, textum

but these

change ui into sum, censeo, censum; cellui celsum; messui, messum; nexui, nexum; pexui, pexum; patui, passum; carui, cassum, and caritum

xi, ctum

vinxi, vinctum; but these five leave out n, finxi, fictum; minxi, mictum; pinxi, pictum; strinxi strictum; rinxi, rictum. Flexi, flexum; plexi, plexum; fixi, fixum: fluxi, fluxum; polluxi, polluctum

 

Of the Compound Supine

In the compound supine some verbs are irregular: compounds of tunsum make tusum; of ruitum, rutum; of saltum, sultum; of sevi, satum, situm; comedo formeth comesum and comestum; but the rest esum only; of nosco, novi, cognitum, and agnitum. But others form notum: noscitum {n. p.} is out of use.

Captum, factum, iactum, raptum, cantum, partum, sparsum, carptum, fartum, change a into e, as conceptum, reiectum, perfectum, concentum, etc.

 

IIII. Anomaly of the Supinal in rus

These supinals are irregularly formed of the supine. Pariturus of partum; nasciturus of natum; sonaturus of sonitum; arguiturus of argutum; luiturus of lutum; eruiturus of erutum; nosciturus of notum; moriturus of the feigned supine mortuum; oriturus of ortum, osurus and futurus; secaturus of lectum; affricaturus, refricaturus, of frictum; tonaturus of tonitum; iuvaturus of iutum; and others of the first conjugation whose supine ends in itum.

 

Heteroclites are redundant or defective.

 

Redundance in the Pretertenses

Caeno, caenavi, caenatus sum; iuro, iuravi, iuratus, sum; poto, potavi, potatus sum and potus sum; titubo, titubavi, titubatus sum; carro, carui, cassus sum; prandeo, prandi, pransus sum; patuo, patui, passus sum; placeo, placui, placitus sum; suesco, suevi, suetus sum; vaeneo, venivi, venditus sum; nubo, nupsi, nupta sum; mereor, merui, meritus sum. And these impersonals, licet, licuit, licitum est; libet, libuit, libitum est; taedet, taeduit, pertaesum est; pudet, puduit, puditum est; piget, piguit, pigitum est; miseret, miseritum and misertum est. {n. p.}

 

Redundance in Supine

Lavi, lotum, lautum, lavatum; necui, necatum, nectum; plicui, plicitum, plicatum; potavi, potum, patatum; tonui, tonitum, tonatum; carui, cassum, caritum; miscui, mistum, mixtum; indulsi, indulsum, indultum; peperi, partum, pertium; torsi, tersum, tortum; alui, altum, alitum; praestiti, praestitum, praestatum, astitum and astatum; tuitus sum, tutum and tuitum.

 

Defect in the Preterperfect Tense

Some do borrow the preterperfect tense of other verbs, and some have no preterperfect tense at all.

These borrow. A derivative in sco used for the primitive hath the preter tense of the same, as revivisco, revixi, of vivo; so pertimesco, scisco, adscisco, rescisco, conscisco. Sisto, statui, and stiti, of statuor; tepesco, tepui, of tepeo; fervesco, fervi, of fervo; cerno, vidi, of video; quatio, concussi, of concutio; ferio, percussi, of percutio; meio, minxi, of mingo; fido, sedi, of sedeo; tollo, sustuli, of suffero; sum, fui, of fuo; fero, tuli, of tulo; furo, insanivi, of insanio; vescor, pastus sum, of pascor; medeor, medicatus sum, of medicor; liquor, liquefactus sum, of liquefio; reminiscor, recordatus sum, of recordor.

 

These have no pretertense

Vergo, ambigo, glisco, fatisco, hisco, polleo, nideo, labo, labasco, urgeor, liquet the impersonal.

All verbs in sco, derived of nouns and therefore having no primitive to borrow a pretertense on, as puerasco, silvesco, fruticesco, sterilesco, ditesco, {n. p.} vesperascit, albescit, etc. To these add aveo, salveo, glabreo.

Passives, whose actives want the supines, as metuor, timeor, etc.

Desideratives, as scripturio, iturio, micturio, cacaturio etc. Except esurio, esurivi; parturio, parturivi.

 

Defect in the Supine

These verbs have no supine, or a supine unusual. Lambo, a mico, rudo, scabo, b parco, c dispesco, d disco, quinisco, e compesco, f posco, dego, ango, sugo, lingo, mingo, satago, algeo, urgeo, turgeo, psallo, volo nolo, malo, labo, tremo, strideo, strido, flaveo, liveo, aveo, paveo, conniveo, ferveo; compounds of nuo, as renuo, anuno; of cado, except occasum, and recasum, so respuo, g linquo, h luo, metuo, cluo, frigeo, calvo, sterto, timeo, sapio, luceo, arceo, whose compounds make ercitum,ingruo, of gruo.

All neuters of the second conjugation in ui. Except oleo, doleo, placeo, taceo, pareo, careo, noceo, pateo, lateo, valeo, caleo. And the most verbs of this conjugation are neuters.

 

General Defectives

Ovat, ovans, ovandi; deiero, peiero. Inquio, or inquam, inquis, inquit, inquiunt, inquisti, inquies, inquit, inque, inquito, inquiens; memento, mementote. Faxo, faxis, faxit, faxumus, faxitis, faxint for faciam, or fecero, forem, fores, foret, forent, fore; quaeso, quaesumus; ausim, ausis, ausit, ausimus, ausitis, ausint; aiebam, aiebas, aiebat, aiebamus, aiebatis, aiebant. Aias, aiat, aiamus, aiatis, aiant, aiens. Salvebis, salve, salveto, salvete, salvere; cedo, cedite, “to tell”, or “to reach”. Infit, “he saith”, or {n. p.} “hath said”. Odi, caepi, memini, novi, have all the tenses formed of them, and they have also the signification of the present tense, as memini, “I do remember”.

 

Of Impersonals

Impersonals are declined in the voice of the third person singular only, whether active or passive. And there is almost no personal but it may be made an impersonal, as also no impersonals, but they may be made personals, except pudet, paenitet, oportet, libit, licet, liquet, decet, taedet, piget; yet there is pudeo, oportent, and oportebant, libent, licent, liquaeo, deceo, taedeo, pigeo, but unusual.

 

Significative words are expounded. Explanatives follow.

 

Of Explanatives

An explanative word is whose signification serveth to explain the significative, and it explaineth either single words, whether nouns, or verbs, or sentences.

 

The Explanative of Nouns is Called a Preposition

A Preposition is a part of speech which, being set before other parts, doth fulfill, change, or deminish the signification thereof.

It is set before other parts in composition, but peculiarly before the case of a noun in apposition, as ad patrem. {n. p.} In regard whereof it is properly called a preposition, for otherwise being set alone, it goeth into the nature of an adverb.

Of prepositions, some are always in composition, namely these six, am, di, dis, re, se con, as ambio, diduco, distraho, recipio, sepono, condono. Some always in apposition, as apud, citra, erga, pone, secundum, circiter, secus, versus, penes, coram, palam, sine, absque, prope, tenus. The rest are indifferent.

In regard of their case or casual word, some are set before the accusative, some before the ablative, some before both, some after both. The misplacing of them is called “anastrophe.

 

I. These thirty-two are set before the accusative

ad

to”: ad te ibam

 

for”: ad nullas preces

 

about”: ad ducentos

 

towards”: ad occasum solis

 

at”: ad diem venit

apud

at”: apud forum

 

with”: apud Pompeium

 

of”: apud maiores factitato

cis, “on this side”: cis Tyberim

citra, “without”: citra musicen

circiter, “about”: circiter meridiem

extra

without”: extra muros

 

besides”: extra unam ancillam

inter

between”: inter os, and offam

 

in time of”: inter caenam and inter quietem

 

among”: inter ipsos {n. p.}

ob

for”: ob italiam

 

before”: ob oculos

penes

in the power”: me penes

 

in”: penes te culpa est

per

by”, or “through”: per Galliam

propter

for”: proper te

 

nigh”, “beside”: propter rivum

praeter

beside”: praeter unum

 

against”: praeter spem, opinionem

 

about”: praeter caeteros

 

beyond”: praeter hominem

 

before”: praeter oculos

post

after”, “behind”: post carecta; post tempus

intra

within”: intra suam fortunam

secundum

beside”, or “nigh to”: secundum aurem

 

after”: secundum deum parentes sunt honorandi

 

for”: secundum causam nostram disputant

 

in”: secundum quietem

 

upon”: secundum ea deliberant

 

according”: secundum pythagoras

supra

above”: supra caput

 

beyond”: supra morem

ante

before”: ante calendas

adversus

against”, “towards”: id gratum adversum te fuiste gaudeo

adversum

over”, “against”: adversum antipolim

circum, circa

about”

contra

against”

erga

towards”

infra

beneath”

iuxta

beside”, or “nigh to”

pone

behind” {K}

prope

nigh”

trans

on the further side”

ultra

beyond”

usque

until”, “even to”

secus

by”

versus

towards”

 

II. These fifteen are set before the ablative case

 

A, Ab, Abs

Of”, “from”: a te accepi

Of”, or “out”: a gente Augusti, “of Caesar’s race”

For”: a senatu stare, i.e. a parte senatus

Against”: defendo a frigore myrtos

Beside”, or “against”: non abs re est

As touching”: ab animo aeger, a me pudica est

Towards”: a sole, a terra

At”, “with”: ab eo gratiam inibo

Because of”, “for”: a metu infamiae, ένεϰα ab amore scribere

Conversant”, or “exercised about”: ῶεςὶ

A poculis est illi, “his cup-bearer”

A commentaris, “a chronicler”

A libellis, “the master of requests”

A memoria, “a recorder”

A rationibus, “an auditor”

A secretis, “a secretary”

Ab epistolis, “a scribe” or “clerk”

A pedibus, “a lackey”

A is set before consonants. Abs before q, and t: abs quivis, abs te. Ab most often before a vowel, and sometimes a consonant, as haud ab re est, “it is not in vain”.

 

De {n. p.}

Of”: Caesar scripsit de grammatica

For, from”: disce id de me

For”, or “because of”: amas nos de fidicina istac

According”, “after”: de more. De sententia tua

By”, “in”: de nocte vigilare

As touching”, “concerning”: de caeteris rebus

After”: de media nocte missus

 

E, ex

Of”: ex auro. Matter

After”, “from”: ex illo tempore. Time.

According to”, “for”: ex dignitate; ex usu; e republica; ex sententia; ex pacto

Of”, “in”: e renibus laborat

Out”, “of”, “in”: e vinclis causam dicere

Of”, or “by”: gradiva est e pamphilo

On”, “from”, etc.: e contrario, “contrarywise”; e diverso, “on the other side”; e facili, “easily”; e longuiquo, “far of”; e regione, “over against”

 

Pro

For”, “because of”: pro istis, dictis, and factis

Before”: religato pro foribus cane

In regard of”, “according to”: pro materia, pro re, pro tempore

In”: pro tribunali

In defence of”: stabat pro templo, pro Rabirio, Milone, etc.

Instead”, or “right”: pro uxore habet; pro nihilo habeo, duco etc., i.e. quasi

 

Prae

Before”: prae me fero

For”, “by reason of”: prae amore, luxuria

In comparison”: prae illo sordes

 

Cum: “with”

 

Coram: “before”, or “in presence”, coram te

 

Clam: “privily”, “unknown to”, clam te est, clam {K2} patrem

 

Sine, absque: “without”, sine Cerere, et libero friget Venus

 

Palam: “openly”

 

Tenus: “until”, or up to, Capulo tenus. Barba tenus philosophus. But if the casual word be the plural number, it shall be the genitive case also, as aurium tenus, “up to the ears”; genuum tenus, “up to the knees”. Pectoribus tenus, “up to the breast”.

 

III. These four are set before both cases

in

accusative

towards”: in me benignus fuit

Some add to these procul, as Tacitus, procul caede. Pliny, procul Neapolim. Procul muros.

 

 

against”: in te; in verrem

 

 

to”: haec via ducit in urbem

 

 

into”: in partes ambas; in cineres

 

ablative

in”: in te spes est

 

sub

accusative

to”: sub umbram properemus

 

 

by”: sub id tempus missus est

 

 

before”: sub noctem, “a little before night”, i.e. ante

 

ablative

under”: sub terra

 

 

in”: sub nocte silenti

 

 

before”: sub iudice lis est. i.e. coram

super

ablative

of”: as, super, ea re. i.e. de ea re

 

 

upon”: fronde super viridi, otherwise an accusative

subter

 

it is set before the accusative and ablative in the same signification: subter terram, subter aquis

 

IIII. These four are set before or after

cum

as

quibuscum

versus

as

Angliam versus

tenus

 

pube tenus

usque

 

ad occidentem usque

 

Of Comparison

Comparison befalleth certain prepositions, as {n. p.}

citra, citerior, citimus

extra, exterior, extimus, extremus

intra, interior, intimus

supra, superior, supremus, summus

infra, inferior, infimus

post, posterior, postremus

ultra, ulterior, ultimus

prope, propior, proximus

ante, anterior

Ovid hath proximior

 

Of an Adverb

An adverb is a part of speech which serveth to explain and perfect the signification of the verb.

Sometime it explaineth a noun, as egregie impudens. Parum philosophus.

Sometime it explaineth itself, as parum honeste se gerit.

 

Of the Accidents

Five things befall an adverb: signification, kind, figure, comparison, order.

The significations of adverbs are gathered from the circumstances of verbs.

 

Of adverbs some signify

1. In a place

hic, illic, istic, intus, foris, usquam, utrobique, ubilibet, alibi, necubi, etc.

2. To a place

huc, illuc, istuc, foras, horsum, aliorsum, deorsum, quoquoversum

3. From a place

hinc, illinc, istinc, aliunde, undelibet, caelitus, divinitus, funditus, usque

4. By a place

hac, illac, istac, ea, aliqua, siqua, nequa, qua, quaqua, where via is understood {K3}

5. Time

hodie, cras, nuper, heri, olim, quando, aliquando, quamdudum, quaprimum, quousque, pridie, postridie, nudiustertius, nudiusquartus, etc., in dies, in horas, cum, tum

6. Number

semel, bis or duis, ter, quater, iterum

7. Order

inde, deinde, hinc, novissimo, inprimis, iampridem, adsummum

8. Asking

cur, quare, quorsum, quamobrem, ecquid, quidita

9. Calling

o, heus, eho, ehodum

10. Denying

haud, non, neutiquam, minime, ne, nequaquam

11. Affirming

etiam, sic, quid, ni, adeo, nimirum, plane, scilicet, licet, esto, nae, quidem, equidem, etc.

12. Swearing

hercle, mehercle, pol, aedipol, castor, ecastor, medius fidius

13. Exhorting

age, sodes, amabo, sultis, eia, agite, agedum

14. Forbidding

non, haud, ne

15. Wishing

o, utinam, si, o si

16. Excluding

modo, dummodo, tantummodo, solummodo, duntaxat, etc.

17. Gathering

simul, una, pariter, universim, non modo, non solum

18. Parting

seorsim, sigillatim, gregatum, viritim, egregie, oppidatim, vicatim, privatim, spenatim, ostiatim, bifariam, trifariam, omnifariam, plurifariam, etc.

19. Diversity

aliter, secus

20. Choosing

potiu, potissimum, imo, satius

21. Intention, or increasing

valde, nimis, nimium, prorsus, impendio, impense, penitus, funditus, radicitus, omnino

{n. p.}

22. Releasing, or abating

vix, aegre, paulatim, sensim, pedentim

23. Granting

licet, esto, demus, sit, ita, sit sane

24. Quality

all that end in “ly”, or “like”, as “learnedly”, “princelike”

25. Quantity

parum, minimum, summum, ad summum, magis, maxime

26. Comparison

non, solum, sed etiam, nedum, tam, quam, magis, minus, maxime, minime, aegre

27. Of a thing not finished

ferme, fere, prope, vix, propemodum, tantum, tantum non

28. Showing

en, ecce, sic, hoc, modo, hoc pacto

29. Explication

id est, hoc est, quasi dicas, pura, utpote

30. Doubting

forsan, forsitan, fortassis, fortasse

31. Chance

forte, fortuito, casu, forte fortuna

32. Likeness

sic, sicut, item, sicuti, itidem, quasi, tanquam, ceu, uti veluti

 

Of Kind

Kind is twofold. Primitive, whereof there be very few, as cras, olim, cum, heri, vix, etc.

Derivative, is derived from other parts.

 

Of the Derivative

Adverbs are derived from some case of a noun or from a verb.

They are made of a noun three ways.

 

I. By Imposition of the Accent

1. These are made of the nominative case: castor, ecastor, pol, aedepol, etc. So nudiustertius, nudiusquartus, nudiusquintus, nudiussextus, i.e. “Now it is the third day since”, etc. {K4}

Likewise many other words: ecquid, nunquid, quantum, utrum, facile, multum, nimium, recens, torvum, aeternum, imitating the Greeks. So hic, illic, huc, illuc, etc., and comparatives in us, as doctius, melius, etc. But magis, or mage.

2. Of the genitive, as impraesentarium

3. Of the dative, as tempori, luci, vesperi

4. Of the accusative, alias, aetatem, in diem et dies, in horam et horas

5. Of the ablative modo, quo modo, quo pacto, qua gratia, initio, vespere, oppido, more, hercle, casu, fortefortuna, ingratiis, gratis, so necessario, mutuo, sedulo, raro, etc., to which locus and via are understood pridie, postridie, etc., i.e. priore die, etc.

 

II. By Apposition of Syllables

1. To the nominative case, quoties, aliquoties, toties, bis or duis, quater, quinquies, and all adverbs of number though something irregularly. Bifariam, trifariam, quadrifariam, quinquefariam, septifariam, multifariam, aliquofariam, omnifariam.

2. To the genitive, divinitus, humanitus, publicitus, humaniter, firmiter, largiter, naviter, ignaviter, etc., which are rather made of the ablative.

3. To the ablative, summatim, centuriatim, tributim, viritim, caelim, punctim, sensim, strictim, furtim, etc., so acriter, fortiter, sublimiter, foeliciter, difficulter, audacter contracts, pariter, aliter, omnino, by adding no, etc.

 

III. By Changing of Letters

1. These are made of the nominative case by changing ans and ens into ter, as prudenter, sapienter, latenter, libenter, recenter, decenter, amanter, diligenter, to which add violenter, luculenter of violentus, luculentus etc.

2. These are made of the ablative by changing {n. p.} o into e, as docte, perite, publice, luculente, large, bene, divine, sedule, etc.

II. Some are made of verbs, as age, sodes, i.e. si audes, or sodalis es; amabo, agite, licet, esto, demus, puta, utputa, scilicet, i.e. scire licet; illicet, i.e. ire licet; sultis, i.e. si vultis; sis, i.e. si vis; apage sis, απαγέ si vis; adesdum, quasi dicas, etc.

 

Of Figure

Of adverbs some are simple, as prudenter; some compound, as imprudenter, so nequa, quoquoversum, pridie, nudiustertius etc., i.e. dies tertius.

 

Of Comparison

Certain adverbs are compared: pridem, prior, primus, poene, penissimus; nuper, nuperrimus; diu, diutior, diutissimus; satis, satior; saepe, saepius, saepissime; bene, melius, optime; male, peius, pessime; magnum or magne magis, or mage, maxime; parum, minus, minime. And all that are derived of compared adjectives, as dicte, doctius, doctissime; fortiter, fortius, fortissime; prope, propius, proxime, with other compared prepositions.

 

Of Order

The adverb of denying is always placed before the verb, as non est cuiuslibet appellere Corinthum.

Adverbs signifying relation are placed after, as other relatives are, as tam bonus, quam dives.

The adverb of forbidding is placed before, as ne saevi magne sacerdos. But most adverbs are placed indifferently.

 

Of a Conjunction

The explanatives of single words are expounded: explanative of sentences followeth it is a conjunction or an interjection. {n. p.}

A conjunction is a part of speech wherewith the parts of an oration, being manifold, are joined together, or whereby the dependence of clauses among themselves is explained and declared.

 

It is enunciative or ratiocinative

Enunciative is whereby the parts of an enunciation are joined, and it is partly congregative, and partly segregative.

Congregative is whereby the parts being as it were true at the same time, are joined together and it is either copulative or connexive.

1. Copulative is wherewith the parts are coupled absolutely, as ac, etiam, item, que, quoque, atque, itemque, nec, neque, neu, neve, cum, and tum. Praeterea hoc amplius, his amplius for praeterea. Simul, “for”, et, or etiam. Some do add these also: quinetiam, sed et, superque, insuper, ad hoc, ad haec, etc.

2. Connexive whereby the consequent, or that which followeth, is coupled upon condition of the antecedent, or that which went before, as si, sin, modo, dum, dummodo, ni, nisi.

Segregative is whereby the parts of an enunciation, as being not true at the same time, are separated, and it is discretive or disjunctive.

3. Discretive is whereby the parts are only separated in reason, as autem, ast, at, interea, interim, ut, vero, verum, nunc, tamen, etsi, tametsi, quanquam, quamvis, extraquam, praeterquam, quin, alioquin.

4. Disjunctive is whereby the parts themselves are so separated as if only one of them could be {n. p.} true, as aut, an, sive, vel, ve, secus.

Ratiocinative, whereby one part of reasoning is as it were proved by the other, and it is called causal or rational.

5. Causal is whereby the cause of the antecedent is rendered, as enimvero, etenim, siquidem, quoniam, quia, nam, namque, ut cum, quando for quoniam, quia, quippe, quod, utpote, siquidem, quandoquidem, propterea quod. These not only notes of the cause, but generally of any argument.

6. Rational is wherewith the consequent is concluded of that which went before, as ergo, ita, itaque, ideo, igitur, quare, quamobrem, quas ob res, quapropter, quocirca.

 

Of Polysyndeton

The anomaly of conjunctions is twofold

polisyndeton

 

asyndeton

Polysyndeton is the redundance or joining together of many conjunctions superfluously, as et copiose, et graviter: the former redoundeth, signifying both the later. And also amplectitur cum eruditos omnes, tum inprimis Marcellum.

Aut bibat, aut abeat: aut redoundeth, signifying either the later or else. Sive ista uxor, sive amica sit. Cicero, Etsi, quamvis non fueris suasor, et impulsor profectionis meae, etc.

But more especially superfluous are expletives, which notwithstanding have their use as quidem equidem, nimirum, enim vero etc. Terence, at enim, non sinam.

 

Of Asyndeton, or Dialyton

Asyndeton is the defect or taking away of the conjunction, as Cicero, abiit, excessit, evasit, erupit. Here the copulative is wanting. Tu cum principem Senatorem {n. p.} domi habeas, ad eum nihil refers, ad eos refers, qui suam domum nullam habent, tuam exhauriunt. The discretives quidem and autem are wanting. Consilium primo capit stultu, verumtamen clemens. Et si is wanting. Terence, memini, tamet si nullus moneas. Tamen is wanting. Cicero, velit, nolit difficile est. The disjunctive is wanting et quod, after volo, nolo, malo, precor, rogo, etc.

The causals ut are often understood, as nolim ita existimes, likewise the verb volo coming before ut is concealed with it. Cicero, ad me de omnibus rebus quam saepissime literas mittas. So ne after caveo, as cave facias, etc.

 

Of Figure

The accidents of a conjunction are figure and order. Some conjunctions are simple, as aut, ut, et, si, que, etc., some are compound, as itemque, neque, etc. But they that are joined to the end of a word are called enclitics, viz, que, ne, ve, dum, sis, nam, as Athamasque, herusue, tantaene, adesdum, etc.

 

Of Order

In regard of order, some are placed before, some after, some indifferently.

These are placed before.

Verum, verumetiam, sed, sed etiam, neque, nedum, atque, ac, et nec, tum, quin, quinetiam, sin, at, astque.

Extraquam, imo, quod, praeter quam, etenim, aut, non.

Quamvis, quas ob res, quamobrem, quocirca, igitur, nam, cum, namque, quapropter. In uneven comparison making cum is placed before, because it signifies the more, as Amplectitur cum eruditos omnes, {n. p.} tum inprimis Marcellum. In even comparison, tum is doubled.

These are placed after.

Tantum, autem, ve, que, interea, interim, enim, quoque, vero.

These are placed indifferentely.

Si, nisi, ni, alioquin, alioqui, licet, ut, tamen, uti.

Itaque, enimvero, siquidem, ne, ergo, itaque, porro.

 

Of an Interjection

An interjection is a part of speech which declareth the sudden passion of the mind under an unperfect voice.

There be so many significations hereof, as there be sudden passions of the troubled mind.

Some are of

mirth: euax, vah, hei, evohe, the noise of Bacchus his priests

sorrow: heu, eheu, hoi, hei, o, ah

dread or fear: hei, atat

marvelling: pape, ώ͂ ποποι

shimming: apage, apagesis, of άπὸά̀γω si, vis

praising: euge

calling: eho, oh, io

 

Some are of

disdaining, as: hem, vah

scorning, as: hui

exclamation, as: oh, proh, proh nefas

cursing, as: malum, vae, malum

laughing, as ha, ha, he

silence, as: au, st, etc. {n. p.}

Moreover, any word or words breaking forth abruptly or suddenly, and from some troubled passion, is an interjection, as Virgil, navibus infandum amissis.

 

Of Scheme or Figure

Scheme or figure is the common affection of etymology. In regard whereof a word is said to be proper, or schematical, or figurative.

There be four schemes or figures. Prothesis, aphaeresis, tmesis, enallage or antimeria.

Prothesis is the putting to of a letter or syllable to the beginning, b middle, or c end of a word, as gnatus, tetuli, for natus, tuli; relligio * caussa, Mavors, for religio, causa, Mars; dicier, for dici.

Aphaeresis is the taking away of a letter, or syllable from the beginning, d middle, or e end of a word, as ruit, temnere, for eruit, contemnere; abiit, dixti, repostum, for abivit, dixisti, repositum; ingeni, dixtin, for ingenii, dixistine. So sit, for siet; tibicen, for tibiicen.

Tmesis is the division of one compound word, one or more words being but between the parts. Terence, quae meo cunque animo libitum est facere. Idem, Thais maximo orabat opere. Terence, omnia prius experiri, quam armis sapientem decet.

 

Enallage

Enallage or antimeria is the immutation or changing of letters, of the parts of speech, or of the {n. p.} kinds and accidents thereof.

 

I. Enallage of Letters

Virgil, olli subridens hominum sator, atque deorum, for illi. Terence, mos gerundus est Thaidi, for gerendus.

 

II. Enallage of One Part for Another

1. The substantive is put for the adverb. Virgil, nec vox hominem sonat o dea certe, for humaniter. Juvenal, qui Curios simulent, et Bacchanalia vivunt, for Bacchanaliter.

2. The adjective nullus is put for non. Cicero, Philotimus non modo nullus venit, sed ne per literas certiorem fecit. Terence, etsi nullus dixeris. Etsi nullus moneas.

3. The preposition is put for the noun. Virgil, neque enim ignari sumus ante malorum, for priorum.

4. The preposition for the verb. Nec fuga iam super ulla, for superest. O mihi sola mei super Astianactis imago. But it is hellenismus.

5. The adverb for the noun. Terence, aliis quia defit quod ament aegre est, for aegrum est. So valde est, partim virorum, for pars. E convivio surrexit cum partim illorum, for parte.

Amplius, plus, minus, are used for plura quam, and minora quam.

Pliny, plus vicena ova incubanda subiici vetant, for plura quam vicena. Livy, hostium plus mille caesi, for plures quam. Cicero, amplius quadraginta diebus mansit, for pluribus quam quadraginta.

Livy, ampius sex millia hominum capta, for plures quam sex millia hominum capti. Millia, for mille, is enallage of gender.

Caesar, a millibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt, {n. p.} for a paucioribus passibus, quam duobus millibus.

6. The adverb is put for the pronoun. Cicero, differo in id tempus, cum scieris, quid actum sit, for in quo. Virgil, genus unde latinum, for a quo. Terence, digna res est, ubi nervos intendas tuos, for in qua.

 

III. Enallage of the Kinds of Each Part

1. The poets use the proper name for the possessive. Virgil, Dardana suscitat arma, for Dardenia, but it is hellenismus.

2. A certain number is put for an uncertain. Virgil, o terque quaterque beati; ter may signify the three faculties of the soul (understanding, will, memory) and quater the four elements.

3. Plures is commonly used for multi.

4. The reciprocal pronouns sui and suus are put for the relative.

Terence, orat, si se ames, ut ad se venias, for illam. Caesar, si quid ille a se velit, illum ad se venire oportere.

Ovid, respice Laerten, ut iam sua lumina condas.

5. The demonstrative is put for the possessive. Terence, desiderio id fit tuo, for tui. Idem, negligentia et odio id fit tuo.

6. A verb absolute is put for the active. Virgil, et mutata suos requierunt flumina cursus. Terence, omnes se foras proruunt. Virgil, spumas salis aere ruebant.

7. The passive is put for the active. Virgil, bellantur Amazones armis. Idem, expoliantur eos, for expoliant. Placidam nutritor olivam, for nutrito. Whereby it seemeth that in ancient times they gave to every active a medium, or common, imitating the Greeks.

8. Many verbs or participials of the active {n. p.} voice signify passively, and many of the passive actively, as evidens, id est aperte videtur. Gellius, equo vehens, for vectus. Horrentia arma, for horrida. So contrarily, circumspectus, consideratus, etc.

9. In conjunctions the copulative is put for the disjunctive. Virgil, aut pelago Danaum insidias, suspectaque dona praecipitare iubet, subiectisque urere flammis, for aut.

The disjunctive for the copulative. Terence, vel mihi rex semperagebat gratias, for etiam.

The copulative for the causal. Virgil, audieras, et fama fuit, for nam. Cicero, non solum nobis nati sumus, ortusque nostri partem sibi vendicat patria, for enim. So ac and atque are put for quam. Terence, neve aliorsum, atque ego feci, acceperit.

The deed or thing done is often used for the narration or telling of it. Virgil, Pasiphaen solatur amore iuvenci, i.e., canit, vel narrat Pasiphaën solari, etc. Idem, tum Phaetondiadas musco circundat amarae. Corticis, atque solo proceras erigit alnos. Id est canit, vel narrat circundatas, et errectas.

 

IIII. Enallage in the Accidents

I. Of Case

1. The nominative is put for the vocative. Virgil, proiice tela manu sanguis meus, for mi. Idem, et quae vos rara viridis tegit arbutus umbra, for arbute. Vos o patricius sanguis, for patricie. It is hellenismus also.

2. The vocative for the nominative. Persius, censoremque tuum vel quod trabeate salutas, for trabeatus. Macte virtute esto, macte ista voluntate, for mactus.

3. The genitive case of a proper name is put for {L} the nominative, as urbs Antiochiae, celsa Butroti urbs. Of a common, as eius rei mihi venit in mentem, for id, or ea res.

4. The dative for the nominative. Livy, Scipio cui Africano fuit cognomen, for Africanus.

5. The nominative for the ablative. Horace, occurrunt animae, quales neque candidiores terra tulit, for qualibus, but it is hellenisimus.

6. The ablative with a preposition for the genitive. Terence, ab eo gratiam hanc inibo, for eius, i.e., gratiam eius merebor. Idem, ea primum ab eo animadvertenda iniuria est, for eius iniuria.

 

II. Of Number

1. The Singular is put for the plural. Terence, ad eone homines ex amore immutarier, ut non cognoscas eundem esse, for eosdem. Ovid, nostros vidisti flentis ocellos, for flentium.

2. The plural for the singular. Terence, eunuchum dixti velle te, quia aolae his utuntur reginae.

 

3. Of Gender

The neuter is put for the masculine or feminine. Terence, ego quoque pereo, quod mihi est charius, i.e., qui mihi sum charior. Virgil, dulce satis humor depulsis arbutus haedis, for dulcis.

 

4. Of Person

Danai, qui parent Atridis, contra Priamum arma sumite.

Terence, si quis me quaerit Rufus, praesto est, for sum.

 

5. Of Mood

1. The indicative is put for the potential. Virgil, et si non alium late iactaret odorem, laurus erat, for esset. Cicero, dices, quid? quasi istuc erat magnum, for esset. {n. p.}

2. The future tense of the indicative for the imperative. Cicero, valebis, meaque negotia videbis etc., for vale, and vide.

3. The imperative for the future tense of the indicative. Virgil, si faetura gregem suppleverit, aureus esto, for eris.

4. The future tense of the potential for the future tense of the indicative, as invenerit, acciderit, viderit, for inveniet, accidet, videbit.

5. The infinitive mood for the preterimperfect of the indicative. Terence, facile omnes preferre, ac pati, for perferebat ac patiebatur. Idem, omnes mihi invidere, ac mordere clanculum, ego autem flocci pendere.

 

6 Of Tense

1. The present tense is used often for the preterperfect in the relation of a thing done. Terence, accedo ad pedissequas, for accessi. Virgil, omnis humo funat Neptunia Troia for fumavit.

2. The preterperfect tense for the preterpluperfect tense. Virgil, ni mea cura resistat, iam flammae tulerint, for tulissent. Livy, me quoque iuvat, velut in parte laboris fuerim, for fuissem.

3. The preterimperfect tense for the preterperfect. Terence, nam si esset unde id fieret, faceremus, for fuisset and fecissemus.

4. The present tense in the infinitive, for the future tense. Virgil, progeniem sed enim Troiano a sanguine duci, for ducendum esse.

5. The preterperfect tense for the future. Quintilian, si tales omnes milites habemus, vicimus, for {L2} vincemus.

6. The future tense of the verb sometimes put with the supinal in rus, as Propertius, si quid doliturus eris.

Ovid, mergite me fluctus, cum rediturus ero.

The figure hendiadys may be referred hither, which is when the substantive is put for the adjective with the conjunction copulative, or when the adjective is changed into the genitive case of his substantive. Virgil, Chalybem, frenosque momortit, for Chalibea frena. Idem, nec mihi displiceat maculis, insignis, et albo, for albis maculis. Idem, molemque, et montes in super altos, for molem altorum montium. Idem, pateris libamus, et auro, for aureis pateris. Idem, per famam, ac populum, for famosum populum.

So, in partem, et praefam, for partem predae. In spiritu mansuetudinis, for spiritu mansueto. {n. p.}

 

The Concordance of the Substantive and Adjective

 

Of Syntaxis

Syntaxis or construction is the second part of grammar that teacheth the true joining of words together.

It hath two parts, concordance and regiment.

Concordance is whereby every apposite agreeth with his supposite.

Concordance is of significatives or explanatives.

Concordance of significatives is of a noun with a noun, or of a noun with a verb.

The concordance of a noun with a noun is of the substantive with the adjective, or of the antecedent with the relative.

 

I. Concordance of the Substantive and the Adjective

The substantive is either true or feigned.

1. The true substantive is first a noun substantive.

2. The adjective put absolutely in the neuter gender.

3. Interrogatives, indefinites, and partitives.

4. Pronoun demonstratives expressed, or understood in the possessive.

5. Pronoun relatives.

The adjective whether it be noun, pronoun, or participle, agreeth with his true substantive in their properties of case, gender, and number.

Amicus certus in re incerta cernitur.

Pulchra omnia sunt difficilia.

Quis bonus est? Ego laborans dives fio. {L3}

Divitias amare noli, quod omnium est sordissimum.

Ex tuo ipsius animo coniecturam feceris.

 

Allaeosis, i.e. alteration.

The affections of this concord are allaeosis and ellipsis.

Allaeosis is whereby they differ in these accidents according to voice, but agree in sense or signification.

And it is either of them all severally, or of two together.

 

Of Number

Allaeosis of number is, first, when many substantives singular of one gender do agree to an adjective plural of the same, as Terence, fidem, et taciturnitatem, quas in te intellexi sitas.

Secondly, when an adjective coming after many substantives singular of the masculine and feminine or neuter gender, agreeth to the masculine or feminine, because the masculine is more worthy than the feminine, and the feminine than the neuter, as rex et regina beati. Chalybs, et aurum sunt in fornace probati.

Thirdly, when one number is put for another, as nostros vidisti flentis ocellos, for flentium.

 

Of Case

Allaeosis of case is when one case is put for another, as * macte vir virtute esto, for mactus, as mactus esto hoc sacrificio, “be thou increased in honour by this sacrifice”.

Salve primus omnium parens patriae appellate, for prime.

 

Of Gender

Allaeosis of gender is when an adjective coming between two substantives of divers genders {n. p.} and one person agreeth with either of them, but elegantly with the latter, as non omnis error stultitia est dicenda.

Gens universa Veneti appellati.

 

Of Number and Gender

Allaeosis of both number and gender is when an adjective plural of the masculine gender agreeth with a substantive of the plural and masculine signification, as gens armati. Pars mersi tenuere ratem.

Virgil, haec manus ob patriam pugnando vulnera passi.

Secondly, when many substantives singular of things not having life agree with an adjective of the neuter gender, though they be other genders, as Arcus et calami sunt bona.

Imperium, et dignitas, quae petiisti.

 

Ellipsis, i.e. defect

Ellipsis is the concealment of the substantive or adjective, which agreeth to the substantive concealed or understood.

 

Of the Substantive

The substantive concealed is known two ways.

First, it is known by the speech or substantive aforegoing, as Terence, Transtulit in Eunuchum suam. Comoediam is concealed.

Centauro in magna. Navi is understood.

Sermonem quem audistis, non est meus. Sermo is understood.

Secondly, it is expressed in the whole aforegoing, and understood to the parts, as duae aquilae volaverunt, haec ob oriente, illa ab occidente.

Populus, alii in divitiis, alii in penuria, vivit. {L4}

 

Of the Adjective

Ellipsis of adjective is when many substantives come together with one adjective expressed, which adjective agreeth with the nighest substantive whether it be in the beginning, * middle, or *end, and is understood to the rest, as datum est fanum episcopis, non domus, non lectus.

Sociis, et regina receptis.

 

The feigned Substantive

The feigned substantive is that which supplieth the place of the true substantive. It is either some other word, some member of a sentence, or whole sentence, as scire tuum nihil est, nisi te scire hoc scia alter.

Audito regem Doroborniam proficisci.

Furtum committere, et furto assentiri aequo supplicio digna.

 

II. Concordance of the Antecedent and Relative

The antecedent is a word that most commonly goeth before the relative, and is rehearsed again of the relative.

It is either true or feigned.

1. The true antecedent is a noun substantive.

2. An adjective put absolutely in the neuter gender.

3. Interrogatives, indefinites, partitives.

4. Pronoun demonstratives expressed or understood in the possessive.

1. The relative agreeth with his true antecedent always in their accidents of number, gender, and {n. p.} person, as vir sapit, qui pauca loquitur.

Quaeque pulchra sunt difficilia.

Non videmus manticae, quod in tergo est. supple (id)

Ovid, ista decent humeros gestamina nostros, qui dare certa ferae, qui vulnera possumus hosti.

2. The relative agreeth with his true antecedent sometimes in case. In the case of the relative are to be considered relation and regiment.

 

Relation

In regard of relation, it agreeth with the antecedent in case three ways.

1. When no antecedent goes afore, as in question asking as, quam excribis sententiam?

2. In like manner, when the relative signifieth indefinitely i.e., Englished by “what”, as Cicero, forstian quaeratis, qui sit iste terror, et quae tanta formido, quae caeteros impediat. Etc.

3. By pleonasm, and that three ways.

1. When the antecedent is twice repeated, as duo erant itinera, quibus itineribus exire possunt.

2. More elegantly when the antecedent is understood in the speech before and expressed with the case of the relative after, as Terence, populo ut placerent, quas fecisset fabulas.

Sermonem quem audistis, non est meus.

3. When the antecedent is expressed with the case of the relative before, and understood in the speech following, as Terence, quae res in se neque consilium, neque modum habent vllum, eam consilio regere non potes.

 

Regiment

In regard of regiment, the relative is put in {n. p.} the same case that the verb requireth wherewith he is construed, as faelix, quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum.

 

Allaeosis

The affections of this concord are allaeosis and ellipsis.

Allaeosis is of number and gender severally, or of both together.

 

Of Number

Allaeosis of number is two ways.

First, when many antecedents singular of one gender agree with the relative plural of the same, as Terence fidem, et taciturnitatem, quas in te intellexi sitas.

Secondly, when a relative plural coming after many antecedents singular of things having like of the masculine and feminine gender, agreeth to the masculine as the worthier, as illum, illamque, quos semper charos habui, ac me diligas.

 

Of Gender

Allaeosis of gender is when a relative coming between two antecedents of divers genders agreeth with either of them, as homines tuentur illum globum quae terra dicitur, or qui terra dicitur.

 

Of Number and Gender

Allaeosis of number and gender is when many antecedents singular signifying things without life, of what gender soever, have a relative plural of the neuter, as arcus et calami, quae fregisti.

 

Ellipsis

Ellipsis is the *concealment of the antecedent, as Virgil, millia quot magnis nunquam venere Mycenis. {n. p.}

Non videmus manticae, quod in tergo est.

 

The Feigned Antecedent

The feigned antecedent is that which supplieth the place of the true antecedent. It is either some one word, some one sentence, or clause aforegoing, or more, as credere, quod dei donum est, idem est, ac salvum fieri.

In tempore veni, quod omnium est primum.

Tu multum dormis, et saepe potas, quae ambo sunt corpori inimica.

 

Note

Id quod is elegantly used for quod, that is to say, when it emphatically recollecteth the speech aforegoing, as id is so likewise used without quod, as Terence, sed eas latinas prius factas scisse se, id vero pernegat.

 

III. Concordance of the Nominative and the Verb

The nominative case is either true or feigned.

1. The true nominative case is a noun substantive.

2. An adjective put absolutely in the neuter gender.

3. The gerund in dum.

4. Interrogatives, indefinites, partitives.

5. Pronoun primitives, whether demonstratives or relatives.

A verb personal agreeth with his true nominative case in number and person, as praeceptor legit, vos vero negligitis.

Quis bonus est? Aperite aliquis ostium.

Abeundum est mihi.

Miser est, qui nummos admiratur. {n. p.}

 

Allaeosis

The affections of this concord are allaeosis and ellipsis.

Allaeosis is of number only.

 

Of Number

Allaeosis of number is four ways.

First, a nominative case singular of the plural signification commonly called a noun of multitude will agree to a verb plural, as quisque caepere, turba ruunt.

Aperite aliquis ostium.

Secondly, many nominative cases singular of one person will agree to a verb plural of the same, as ira, et furor mentem praecipitant.

Thirdly, when a verb commeth between two nominative cases of divers numbers and one person, the verb will agree to either, as nihil hic nisi carmina desunt.

Pectora percussit, pectus quoque robora fiunt.

Fourthly, when several persons singular come before the verb, it shall be the plural number, and agree with the worthier, as neque ego, neque tu sapimus.

Ego, et suavissimus Cicero valemus. Si tu, et Tullia lux vestra valetis.

Ego cum fratre sumus candidi.

 

Ellipsis

Ellipsis is of the nominative and the verb severally, or of them both together.

 

Of the Nominative Case

First, the nominative case of the first or second person is most usually concealed, except in vehement or significant speaking, as tibi aras, tibi occas, tibi seris. {n. p.}

Ovid, tu dominus, tu vir, tu mihi frater eris.

Secondly, the nominative case of the third person referred to men is most often concealed, as ferunt, aiunt, fertur, praedicant, etc.

 

Of the Verb

The Verb concealed is either once expressed in the same speech, or understood by the context of a former speech.

The verb concealed in the same speech is first expressed in the whole and understood to the parts, as duae aquilae volaverunt, haec ab oriente, illa ab occidente.

Secondly, when many nominatives come together, the verb agreeth with the nighest, whether it be in the beginning, middle, or end, and is understood to the rest, as datur fanum episcopis, non domus, non lectus.

Iohannes fuit piscator, et Petrus.

Hic illius arma, hic currus fuit.

Ego, et tu studes.

The verb to be understood by the context of a former speech is concealed most often in a question asked, as egone illam? Quae illum? Quae me? Quae non? Here are understood ulciscar, recepit, exclusit, admisit. Virgil, quos ego: sed motos praestat componere fluctus. Puniam is understood.

 

Of Both the Nominative and the Verb

Ellipsis of them both is most usual in such like speeches. Haec hactenus. Diximus is understood. Quid multa? Dicam is concealed. Terence, adeone homines immutari ex amore, ut non cognoscas eundem esse. Possibile est, is concealed.

 

Note

Elliptical concordance and government also {n. p.} are most usual in familiar and passionate speeches, as in comedies and tragedies.

 

The Feigned Nominative Case

The feigned nominative case supplieth the place of the true nominative case. It is either some one word, some member of a sentence, or whole sentence, or more.

Scire tuum nihil est, nisi te scire hoc sciat alter.

Partim virorum ceciderunt in bello.

Adde, quod ingenuas didicisse fideliter artes, emollit mores, nec sinit esse feros.

Audire, credere, sequi Christum, et verbum eius satis sunt ad beatam vitam.

 

I. Concordance of the Adverb

The second concordance is of explanatives, that is of the adverb and the conjunction.

The adverb agreeth to a noun, whether substantive or adjective, and to a verb.

 

To a Substantive

These adverbs ubi and unde supply the place of the relative, and agree to his antecedent, as Terence, sive adeo digna res est, ubi nervos intendas tuos. I.e. inqua.

Eum causam dicere prius, unde petitur aurum. I.e. a quo.

 

To an Adjective

This adverb quam agreeth to the positive, as tam bonus, quam sapiens.

To the comparative, either by following one or being put between two, as non quicquam facio libentius, quam scribo.

Serius, quam crudelius factum. {n. p.}

To the superlative, as habere quam laxissimas habenas.

Quam celerrime mittere.

Ut agreeth to the superlative degree, and sometimes tam: ut diligentissime potui. Res tam maxime necessaria.

Tanto, quanto, multo, longe, agree to the comparative, and superlative degree, as tanto tu pessimus poeta, quanto tu optimus patronus. Longe periculosissimum.

Adverbs of number agree to all distributives, as bis, bina. Ter, tria. Septenos octies solis anfractus.

In equal comparison making tam comes before the positive, quam before the positive or superlative.

 

To the Verb

The adverb agreeth to some one special mode of a verb as to the indicative, or subjunctive, or to more.

 

To the Indicative

Ut, signifying “as”, “how”, or put for postquam, “after that”.

Donec, for quamdiu, “as long as”.

Dum, for quamdiu, “so long as”, or speaking of a thing present.

 

To the Subjunctive

Ut, signifying “that”, “to the end”, “although”, or put for ne non, as metuo ut substet hospes, i.e. ne non substet.

Quoad, for donec, “until”, as quoad excercitus huc mittatur.

Ne, forbidding, as ne metuas. Sometimes to the imperative. {n. p.}

 

The Concordance of the Conjunction

The Conjunction agreeth especially to the moods of a verb.

These agree to the indicative mood.

Etsi, tametsi, etiamsi, quanquam in the beginning of a speech.

Ne, an, num, joined to a verb of asking.

Ut for postquam, quemadmodum, sicut, or an interrogative.

These agree to the subjunctive.

Etsi, tametsi, etiamsi, quanquam, often in the middle of a speech.

Quamvis, and licet most often.

Cum, for quamvis, “although”, for quandoquidem, “seeing that”, quoniam “because”.

Ut, for quanquam, “although”, and for utpote, “for”, “as much as”, “because”.

Ne, an, dum, signifying doubting.

 

Of Regiment or Government

Regiment is whereby one word is governed of another.

It is either of a noun or a verb.

The regiment of a noun is whereby the case of a noun is said to be governed.

A case is governed either by self-government, or by dependance on another word.

Self-government is when a word is put absolutely in some case, that is by virtue of his own signification.

Government by dependence is when a case being construed with another word whether it be a word of number, or without number, is governed of the same. {n. p.}

Case is governed of another word by virtue of his

signification

 

comparison

 

composition

 

The Government of the Nominative Case

The nominative case is governed by dependence of a

substantive

 

verb

 

conjunction

 

adverb

 

interjection

 

Of the Substantive

1. The nominative case is governed of the substantive wherewith it is construed by apposition, that is, when they both belong to one thing, as pater meus vir amat me puerum. Flumen Rhenus. Marcus Tullius Cicero. Urbs Athenae.

 

Allaeosis

The later substantive is sometimes put in the genitive case by allaeosis, as urbs Patavii, urbs Antiochiae.

2. The noun substantive is likewise governed of the pronoun substantive being of the first or second person by evocation, that is when the first or second person calleth out the third to make his construction, by virtue whereof it is changed into the first or second person, as ego pauper laboro. Tu dives ludis. Ego tuae deliciae istuc veniam.

 

Ellipsis {M}

The first or second person is sometimes concealed by ellipsis, as populus superamur ab uno. Nos is understood.

 

Of the Verb

The nominative is governed of the verb by coming before it, or after it.

1. The nominative case of a noun or pronoun demonstrative commeth before the verb, as praeceptor docet.

Tu cubas supinus.

2. The nominative case of the relative commeth sometimes immediately before the verb, as miser est qui nummos admiratur.

3. The nominative case of the gerund cometh before est, signifying necessity or duty, made in the English phrase by “must” or “ought”, as abeundum est mihi, “to depart from hence belongs of necessity to me, o𝔯, I muſt go hence.

Utendum est aetate, “to make uſe of time belongs of duty to us”, or “we ought to make use of time”, nobis is understood.

 

Note

When thing or things come with an adjective, it is made a substantive of the neuter gender, and hath the construction of a substantive, as multa me impedierunt.

4. Verbs substantives, sum, forem, fio, existo. Certain passives, dicor, vocor, salutor, nominor, habeor, existimor, videor, etc.

Verbs of gesture, eo, incedo, curro, sedeo, appareo, bibo, cubo, studeo, dormio, somnio, etc., do govern also a nominative case after them, as {n. p.} Craesus vocatur dives.

5. All verbs almost will have a nominative case of a noun adjective after them, without an infinitive mood between, agreeing with the supposite of the verb, as nemo saltat sobrius. Pii orant tacti.

6. If a nominative case with his verb have after them an infinitive mood, and the case that followeth the infinitive mood belonging to the nominative before the accusative coming between, they must be both one, as hypocrita cupit videri iustus etc.

Ovid, nec tu meus esse negari dignus es.

 

Of the Adverb

En and ecce, adverbs of showing, do most commonly govern a nominative case, as en Priamus. Ecce tibi status noster.

 

Of the Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives and these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, do couple like cases, as Xenophon et Plato fuere aequales.

 

Of the Interjection

These interjections, o, heu, pro oh, do often govern a nominative case, as o, sestus dies hominis. Heu prisca fides. Proh nefas, oh paupertas faelix.

 

The Government of the Genitive Case

The Genitive case is

put absolutely

 

governed by dependence

 

It is put absolutely four ways.

1. The proper name of a town of the singular number and first or second declension, answering {M2} “by”, “at”, or “in” to a question made by “where” is put absolutely in the genitive case, as vixit Londini. Studuit Oxoniae.

2. Humi, domi, militiae, belli are likewise used absolutely in the genitive case, as procumbit humi bos.

Domi bellique otiosi vivitis.

 

Note

Domi in this construction admitteth no other genitive cases, but meae, tuae, suae, nostrae, vestrae, alienae, as vescor domi meae, non alienae. For otherwise it hath the construction of common nouns.

3. Words of any quality or property, to the praise or dispraise of a thing, and also the description of a thing coming after a noun substantive or verb substantive is put absolutely in the genitive case, as puer bonae indolis, or bona indole.

4. The measure of length, breadth, or thickness of any thing is put after adjectives, sometimes in the genitive case, as Columella, in morem horti areas latas pedum denum, longas quinquagenum facito.

 

Governed by Dependence

The genitive is governed by

substantive

 

dependence of a

adjective

 

 

verb

participles

 

 

gerunds

 

 

supines

 

adverb

 

 

conjunction

 

 

preposition

 

 

Of the Substantive

1. When two substantives come together betokening divers things, the latter shall be the genitive case of the subject, as facundia Ciceronis. If {n. p.} they belong both to one thing, they are put both in one case, as aforesaid.

 

Allaeosis

By allaeosis the genitive is changed into the adjective possessive, as patris domus, paterna domus.

2. The genitive cases of the pronoun primitives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, signifying passion or suffering, have the same construction, as pars tui. Amor mei.

 

Ellipsis

Note that the former substantive is concealed by ellipsis, as huius video Byrrhiam, supple servum. Hectoris Andromache, supple uxor.

 

Allaeosis

The genitive case is sometimes changed into another case by allaeosis, as Ciceronis libri sunt omne genus elegantia referti, for omnis generis. Id ne autores estis mihi, for eius. So id genus, for eius generis. Quod genus, for cuius generis, is usual. Habuit duos gladios, quibus altero te occisurum minatur, altero villicum, for quorum.

Secondly, these genitives demonstratives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, nostrum, et vestrum, are changed into their possessives meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, which agreeing with the former substantive govern after them certain genitives, which agree not to the possessive, but to the demonstrative understood in the possessive.

Now these genitives are ipsius, solius, vnius, duorum, trium, etc., omnium, plurium, paucorum, cuiusque, and the genitives of participles, as ex tuo ipsius animo coniecturam feceris. Ipsius agreeth to the demonstrative tui understood in the possessive tuo. {M3}

Meum solius peccatum corrigi non potest, for mei.

Vester duorum eventus ostendit, for vestri.

3. An adjective being changed into the nature of a substantive, i.e. put absolutely in the neuter gender, governeth a genitive case, as paullulum pecuniae. Hoc noctis.

4. The genitive case of the gerund is likewise governed of certain other substantives aforegoing: studum, causa, tempus, gratia, otium, occasio, libido, spes, oportunitas, voluntas, modus, ratio, gestus, satietas, potestas, licentia, consuetudo, consilium, vis, norma, amor, cupido, locus, etc., as studium discendi. Causa videndi, tempus eundi.

 

Note

Note that this gerund in di supplieth the place of the infinitive mood active coming after these, and such like substantives, as studium discere, studium discendi. Tempus abire, tempus abeundi.

5. The gerund in di governeth also sometimes a genitive case plural, but more seldom a singular, as illorum videndi gratia in forum me contuli.

Principium aliquod generandi animalium fuit.

Date crescendi copiam rerum novatum.

Illius videndi gratia huc veni.

 

Of the Adjective

The genitive case is governed of the adjective by

signification

reason of his

comparison

 

I. By Reason of Signification

1. Adjectives of affinity, desire, knowledge, remembrance, ignorance, forgetting, with their contraries, do govern a genitive case, as affinis suspicionis, {n. p.} cupidus auri.

2. Adjectives of likeness and unlikeness in property or quality, govern a genitive case, as domini similis es. Quem metuis, par huius erat.

To these add dignus, indignus, communis, immunis, alienus, which sometimes govern a genitive case, as militia est operis altera digna tui.

3. Many adjectives in idus, osus, ius, rus, gus, vus govern a genitive case.

4. Adjectives in ax derived from verbs do govern a genitive case, as audax ingenii. Tempus edax rerum.

Virtus est vitiorum fugax. Utilium sagax.

5. Adjectives signifying plenty, fullness, emptiness, wanting, govern a genitive case, as vacuus laboris. Plenus verborum.

6. Nouns partitives or put partitively do govern a genitive case whereof they borrow their gender, as quisque, unusquisque, uterque, uter, neuter, nemo, nullus, solus, medius, quicunque, quidam, unus, aliquis, and quis for aliquis, as nemo vestrum. Aliquis nostrum. Uter eorum. Neuter horum.

7. Certain interrogatives and nouns of number govern a genitive case whereof they borrow their gender, as unus, duo, tres, quatuor etc., primus, secundus, tertius, etc. Quisnam eorum, tres fratrum, quatuor iudicium, primus omnium.

8. Adjectives of knowledge, ignorance, and desire, govern the gerund in di, which hath the signification of the infinitive mood active, as Cupidus visendi. Certus eundi, peritus iaculandi. Gnarus bellandi. Which gerund is poetically turned into the infinitive mood, as peritus medicari, for {M4} medicandi.

9. The participle transformed into the nature of an adjective governeth a genitive case, that is to say when it loseth the signification of the verb, as appetens vini. Indoctus pilae. Amantissimus tui. Fidens animi. Profusus sui.

 

II. By Reason of Comparison

Adjectives of the comparative and superlative degree, put partitively with these signs “of” or “among”, do govern a genitive case, as Cicero oratorum eloquentissimus. Maior vestrum. Maximus natu nostrum.

 

Of the Verb

The genitive case is

substantive

personal

governed of the verb

 

impersonal

 

adjective, or other verbs

personal

 

 

impersonal

And that by reason of signification only.

 

Substantive Personal

1. This verb sum signifying possession, owing, property, duty, or belonging to any thing doth govern a genitive case, as haec vestis est patris. Insipientis est dicere, non putaram.

 

Allaeosis

By allaeosis the pronouns demonstratives are changed into their possessives meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester, as hic codex est meus, mentiri non est meum. Haec domus est nostra, non vestra.

 

Impersonal {n. p.}

Interest est, for interest, and this verb refert do govern a genitive case, as interest omnium recte agere.

Prudentis est multa dissimulare. Refert multum Christianae reipublicae. Episcopos esse pios, et doctos.

Likewise an accusative with a preposition, as interest ad laudem meam.

To these are added these genitives tanti, quanti, magni, parui, quanticunque, tantidem, as magni refert quibuscum vixeris.

 

Allaeosis

By allaeosis the genitives demonstratives are changed into the ablative possessives feminine mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, cuia, as mea, interest. Tua refert teipsum nosse. Here parte is understood.

 

Adjective Personal

1. Verbs of accusing, condemning, warning, purging, quitting, or absolving govern a genitive case of the crime, as hic furti se alligat. Admonuit me errati. Furti absolutus est.

2. Verbs that betoken to esteem or regard do govern a genitive case, as parvi ducitur probitas. Maximi penditur nobilitas.

3. These genitives put alone without substantives, tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, tantivis, tantidem, quantivis, quantilibet, quanticunque, magni, maximi, minimi, parvi, aequi, boni, and also flocci, nauci, nihili, pili, assis, huius, teruntii are governed of verbs signifying price, value, or esteeming, as quanti mercatus es hunc equum? Certe pluris, quam vellem. Flocci te pendo. Non huius te facio, qui me pili aestimas.

Aequi boni consulo or facio, id est in bonam accipio partem. {n. p.}

4. Verbs of plenty, scarceness, filling, emptying, loading, unloading, and diverse such like govern a genitive case, as lactis abundat. Careo tui. Egeo or indigeo tui. Dextra saturata caedis, participo te mei consilii. Implentur veteris Bacchi pinguisque ferinae.

5. Satago, misereor, miseresco, reminisco, obliviscor, recordor, memini, and potior, governs often a genitive case, as Rerum suarum satagit. Obliviscor carminis. Potior urbis.

6. Certain verbs poetically govern a genitive case, as absurde facis, qui angas te animi. Exanimatus pendet animi. Desipiebam mentis. Discrucior animi.

 

Impersonal

These impersonals miseret, miserescit, or miseretur, taedet, piget, penitet, pudet, do together with an accusative govern a genitive case, as miseret me tui. Pudet me stultitiae.

 

participle

Of the

gerund

 

supine

As participles are adjectives, and gerunds and supines substantives in regard of certain properties whereof they partake with them, so in regard of signification and other properties they are verbs having the same construction that their finites have. Hence it is that gerunds and supines are governed, and do govern.

 

Of the Adverb

Adverbs govern a genitive case

 

quantity

by reason of

signification, i.e.

time

 

 

place

 

comparison

likeness

 

Of Quantity

These adverbs, parum, satis, abunde, affatim, govern a genitive case, as eloquentiae satis. Sapientiae parum. Abunde fabularum audivimus. Affatim vini in castris reliquit.

 

Of Time

These adverbs, nunc, tunc, interea, pridie, postridie, govern a genitive case, as nunc dierum. Tunc temporis. Pridie calendarum. Interea loci.

 

Of Place

These adverbs, ubi, ubinam, nusquam, eo, longe, qua, quo, ubivis, huccine, govern a genitive case, as ubi es hominum. Quo terrarum abiit. Eo impudentiae ventum est. Nusquam loci. So minime gentium. Longe gentium.

 

Note

Qua is used sometimes otherwise, as Cicero, at quam honesta, quam expedita consilia tua, qua itineris, qua navigationis, qua congressus, sermonisque cum Caesare, Englished thus: “partly concerning the journey, partly concerning the navigation”, or rather thus, “what for the journey, what for the navigation”, etc.

 

Of Likeness

This adverb instar signifying equality, measure, or likeness, governeth a genitive case, as instar montis, instar omnium.

 

Allaeôsis

By allaeosis, this adverb instar obtaineth the force of a noun, having the preposition ad before it, as vallis ad instar castrorum clauditur, i.e. ad similitudinem.

 

Of Comparison

Adverbs of the comparative and superlative {n. p.} degree, put partitively, do govern a genitive case, as omnium elegantissime, optime omnium dixit.

 

Of the Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, and these four, quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like cases, except the word to which they are joined govern diverse cases, as emi fundum centum nummis, et pluris.

 

Of the Preposition

This preposition tenus governeth a genitive plural, which in construction is set before it, as aurium tenus.

 

The Government of the Dative Case

The dative case is

put absolutely

 

governed by dependence

 

Put Absolutely

1. The proper name of a place, being of the plural number or third declension, is put in the dative case, as Militavit Carthagini. Athenis natus est. So ruri.

2. These datives tibi, sibi, mihi, are sometimes used absolutely, not of necessity but elegantly, as suo sibi hunc iugulo gladio. Ecce tibi status noster.

3. These datives tempori, luci, vesperi, seem to be used absolutely in the dative case, as tempori surgendum. Luci laborandum. Vesperi cubandum.

 

Governed by Dependence

 

substantive

 

The dative case is governed by

adjective

 

dependence of the

verb

participle

 

 

gerunds

 

 

supines

 

adverb

 

 

conjunction

 

 

interjection

 

{n. p.}

 

Of the Substantive

1. When two substantives come together signifying diverse things, the latter is often used in the dative case, as herus tibi, urbi maritus. Obtemperatio legibus.

Cervix cur lactea crines accepit.

2. The latter substantive is put in the dative case by apposition.

 

Of the Adjective

The adjective governeth a dative by reason of

signification

 

composition

 

By Reason of Signification

1. All Adjectives put acquisitively, that is to say, with these tokens “to”, orfor” after them, do govern a dative case, as supplex omnibus, mihi proprium. Aequalis Hectori.

2. The gerund in do dependeth of adjectives likewise that govern a dative case, as oportunum augendo exercitum. Inutilis scribendo. Non sum solvendo. Potis is understood by ellipsis.

3. Adjectives of affinity govern a dative case, as affinis suspicioni.

4. Of profit and disprofit, as labor est utilis corpori.

5. Of likeness and unlikeness, as similis mihi, par, et impar huic.

6. Of pleasure, and displeasure: as, iucundus omnibus. To these may be added communis, immunis, alienus, proprius, amicus, inimicus, contrarius, infestus, infensus, molestus, gratus, gravis, charus, dulcis, bonus, idoneus, etc.

7. Of diversity, as huic diversum.

8. Of number, as nulli poetate secundus. {n. p.}

9. Adjectives of the passive signification in bilis, and gerundives in dus, govern a dative case, as flebilis omnibus. Mos gerundus est Thaidi.

 

By Reason of Composition

Adverbs compounded with these prepositions, con, per, prae, ob, do govern a dative case, as contubernalis, commilito, conservus, cognatus, conscius, confinis, obvius, obnoxius, as mihi sum conscius. Obvius illi. Pervius ulli.

 

Note

No case is governed of the adjective that agreeth with it.

 

Of the Verb

The dative case is governed

substantive by reason of

signification

of the verb

 

composition

 

adjective, by reason of

signification

 

 

composition

 

Of the Verb Substantive by Reason of Signification

1. Sum, signifying necessity or duty, expressed with these signs “must”, or “ought”, governeth a dative case of the person, as abeundum est mihi.

 

Ellipsis

This dative is most commonly concealed by ellipsis, as utendum est aetate, cito pede labitur aetas.

2. Sum, put for habeo, governeth a dative case as, est mihi mater.

3. Sum, put for afferre, governeth two dative cases, whereof the former may be the nominative, as sum tibi praesidio, or praesidium.

 

By Reason of Composition. {n. p.}

Sum being compounded, except with the defective potis, governeth a dative case, as mihi nec obes, nec prodes.

 

Of the Verb Adjective

The dative

case is governed

of other verbs

active

personal

 

signification

 

impersonal

by reason of

 

passive

personal

 

 

 

impersonal

 

composition

 

By Reason of Signification

1. All verbs put acquisitively, that is to say, having these tokens “to”, orfor” after them, do govern a dative case, as huic habeo, non tibi.

Note that many verbs govern two datives: one of the person, and another of the thing, as hoc tu tibi laudi ducis.

2. Verbs that signify profit or disprofit govern a dative case, as commodo, incommodo, noceo.

3. Of giving and restoring do govern a dative of the person, and likewise their contraries, detraho, tollo, abrogo.

4. Of comparing, as comparo, compono, confero, praesto, excello, antecello, antecedo.

5. Of promising, or paying, as promitto, profiteor, polliceor, soluo.

6. Of commanding or showing, as impero, praesideo, praeficio, praedominor, indico, monstro.

7. Of obeying, favouring, resisting, as obedio, servio, famulor, ancillor, pareo, ausculto, for obedio, pugno, studeo, vaco, invigilo, incumbo, assentior, adulor, parco, palpor, blandior, repugno, resisto, placeo, displiceo, etc.

8. Of trusting, as fido, confido, credo, fidem, {n. p.} habeo.

9. Of threatening, or being against, as minor, indignor, irascor, minitor, interminor, refragor, adversor, insidior, officio, etc.

 

Note

Many of these verbs govern a dative of the person and an accusative of the thing, as hoc tibi monstro.

10. The dative case of the gerund is governed also of diverse verbs that govern a dative case, as Epidicum quaerendo operam do.

11. Verbs of arraying governing two accusative cases, change the one of them into the dative, as induo tibi tunicam.

12. Certain verbs of receiving, distance, or taking away, govern a dative case, as Eripuit illi vitam.

13. Misereor and miseresco sometimes govern a dative case, as huic succurro, huic misereor.

Dilige iure bonos, et miseresce malis.

14. Those verbs following having those significations do govern a dative case, as consulo tibi, “I give thee good counsel”.

Consule saluti tuae, “have care of thy health”.

Metuo, timeo, formido, caveo tibi, “I am careful for thee”.

Ausculto tibi, “I obey thee”.

Mitto, refero, do tibi literas, not to yourself, but to you to give some other.

 

Note

Those verbs following have a diverse construction.

Dono tibi hoc munus, dono te hoc munere. {n. p.}

Impertio te plurima salute. Impertio tibi plurimam salutem.

Aspersit mihi labem. Aspersit me labe.

Instravit equo penulam. Instravit equum penula.

Ad amorem nihil potuit accedere, hoc accessit meis malis.

Illud constat omnibus. Illud constat inter omnes.

Adamas dissidet magneti. Adamas dissidet cum magnete.

Certat cum illo. Certat illi. (Graecanice.)

Pugnat duobus. Pugnat contra duos.

 

Passive

1. A verb passive sometimes governeth a dative case of the doer, as Tibi fama petatur.

Nulla tuarum audita mihi, nec visa sororum.

2. Exosus and perosus signifying passively govern a dative case, as exosus deo, and sanctis.

Germani Romanis perosi sunt.

 

Impersonal Active

These impersonals govern a dative case. Accidit, certum est, contingit, constat, confert, competit, conducit, convenit, placet, displicet, dolet, expedit, evenit, liquet, licet, nocet, obest, prodest, praestat, patet, stat, restat, benefit, malefit, satisfit, sufficit, seperest, vacat, for pro otium est.

 

Impersonal Passive

Verbs impersonals neuters of the passive voice govern the cases of their personals, as Parcatur sumptui.

 

By Reason of Composition

1. Verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male, govern a dative case, as omnibus satisfacio. {N}

2. Verbs compounded with these prepositions, prae, ad, ante, post, ob, in, inter, sub, de, re, con, for the most part govern a dative case. But praecedo, praeeo, praevinco, praecurro, praevertor, do often govern an accusative, and praecedo always.

 

Of the Adverb

Certain adverbs do govern a dative case, like as the nouns whereof they are derived, as venit obviam illi. Canit similiter huic. Sibi inutiliter vivit.

 

Of the Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, and these four, quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like cases, except the verb governeth divers cases.

 

Of the Interjection

These interjections, hei, heu, vae, or veh govern a dative case, as hei mihi. Heu misero mihi. Vae capiti tuo.

 

Of the Accusative Case

The accusative case is

put absolutely

 

governed by dependence

 

Put Absolutely Five Ways

1. The measure of length, breadth, or thickness of any thing is most commonly put in the accusative case after adjectives, as turris alta centum pedes. Arbor lata tres digitos. Liber crassus tres pollices.

2. Nouns that betoken continually term of time, without ceasing or intermission, answering to “how long”, are put in the accusative case without a preposition, as annos fere quadraginta quinque feliciter regnavit Eliza. {n. p.}

 

Allaeosis

Likewise we say promitto in diem. Commodo in mensem. Annos ad quinquaginta natus, per tres annos studui. Ad tertium calendas, vel calendarum.

3. The space of place is commonly put in the accusative case, as Pedem hinc ne discesseris. Iam mille passus processeram. Abest bidui. Spatium, or iter, is understood by ellipsis.

4. Proper names of great places, as countries and isles, are used with a preposition, as veni per Galliam in Italiam.

5. The proper name of a place, answering to “whither” by the sign “to”, is put in the accusative case, as eo Romam.

 

Note

Domus and rus do follow the construction of proper names, as ego Rus ibo. Domum redeo.

 

Note

If the place be near by, the preposition ad may be expressed, as ad Genevam pervenit.

 

Governed by Dependence

The accusative is

governed by

dependence of the

substantive

 

adjective

participles

verb, with his

gerunds

adverb

supines

conjunction

 

preposition

 

interjection

 

 

Of the Substantive

When two substantives come together belonging to one thing, they are put both in one case, as pater meus vit, amat me puerum.

 

Of the Adjective. {N2}

1. All nouns adjectives signifying any property or passion may govern an accusative of the place where the property is, as aeger pedes. Saucius frontem.

2. These adjectives, natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, aptus, govern an accusative case with a preposition, as natus ad gloriam. Ad nullam rem utilis.

3. The gerund in dum is used after adjectives with these prepositions, ad, ob, propter, circa, as haec ad iudicandum sunt facillima.

4. Nouns of number govern an accusative case with these prepositions, inter, ante, as primus ibi inter omnes.

 

Of the Verb

The accusative case

substantive

personal

is governed of the verb

adjective

impersonal

 

Verb Substantive

The verb esse will have an accusative after him always when it hath one before it, as omnes fontes esse gelidiores. Otherwise it may have such case after it as it hath before it, that is, such case as the verb afore going doth govern, as expedit bonas esse vobis, or bonis.

Nobis non licet esse tam disertis, or disertos.

Quo mihi commisso non licet esse piam.

Ovid, sed nocet esse deum.

 

Verb Adjective Personal

Verbs transitives of what kind soever, whether they be active, common, or deponent, govern an accusative case, as percontatorem fugito. Studium {n. p.} quibus arva tueri.

Inprimis venerare deum. Aper agros depopulatur.

2. Verbs neuters, whose action doth pass into a word of their own signification, or of a near signification do cause it to be the accusative case, as vivere vitam. Longam ire viam. Duram servire servitutem. Dormire somnum. Bibere vinum. Currere stadium.

3. The infinitive mood governeth before him elegantly an accusative case with this English “that” before it, which being Latined by quod or, ut, causeth the accusative to be turned into the nominative, and the infinitive into some other: as Rumor est meum gnatum amare, or, quod meus. Gnatus amat. Iubeo te abire, or, ut abeas.

4. Verbs passives and neuters absolute signifying any property or passion, may govern an accusative case of the place, where the property or passion is, as doleo caput. Candet dentes. Rubet capillos. Truncatus membra bipenni.

Effusas laniata comas. Contusaque pectus.

5. Verbs of asking, teaching, and arraying, govern two accusative cases, one of the person and another of the thing, of which sort are doceo, erudio, moneo, celo, consulo, rogo, interrogo, posco, oro, flagito, hortor, exigo, facio, praesto, voco, dico, appello, nuncupo, as doceo te literas. Consulo te hanc rem. Praesta te virum. Rogo te pecuniam. Quod te iamdudum hortor. Exuo me gladium.

6. These verbs tempero and moderor do sometimes govern an accusative case. Metuo, timeo, formido, caveo te, ne mihi noceas, consulo te, i.e., peto a te consilium.

Likewise, these have an accusative case with a {N3} preposition: consulo in te, i.e., statuo. Refero ad te, i.e., to you alone, or especially. Refero ad Senatum, i.e., propono, scribo. Do ad te literas, i.e., to yourself. Mirto ad te, i.e., to you alone. Celo tibi rem, celo te de hac re. Induo te tunica, induo tibi tunicam.

7. Valeo governeth sometimes an accusative case, as denarii dicti, quod denos aeris valebant.

8. Reminiscor, obliviscor, recordor, memini, govern sometime an accusative case, as reminiscor, lectionem. Recordor pueritiam. Likewise memini de hac re, de armis, de te, i.e., mentionem facio.

9. Verbs of comparing govern an accusative sometimes with a preposition, as si ad eum comparatur nihil est.

10. Certain verbs that signify profit or disprofit govern an accusative case, as unum studetis omnes. Fessum quies plurimum iuvat. But commonly with a preposition, as nihil curant praeterquam, quae ad ventris victum conducunt Epicuri de grege porci. In haec studia incumbite. Natura plus ad eloquentiam conducit, quam doctrina.

11. Certain verbs compounded with these prepositions, prae, ad, con, sub, post, ante, do sometimes govern an accusative case, as praestat ingenio alius alium.

12. The accusative case of the gerund is used after participles of the present tense, and verbs especially moving to a place, with these prepositions, ad, ob, propter, inter, ante, and circa, as Cantabrigiam concessi ad capiendum ingenii cultum.

13. The accusative case of the gerund, or gerundive, {n. p.} is elegantly used without esse after these verbs: puto, existimo, censeo, loco, mando, curo, trado, habeo, video, dico, intelligo, arbitror, suspicio, etc. Existimo hanc rem tractandam. Putavi ad te scribendum. Multa intelligo subeunda pericula. Hoc onus a me reportandum suscepi.

14. Exosus, perosus, and pertaesus, having an active signification, do govern an accusative case, as exosus saevitiam, “hating cruelty”. Vitam pertaesus. Immundam segnitiem perosae.

15. The accusative is sometimes governed of verbs poetically and figuratively, as Virgil nec vox hominem sonat, o dea certe.

Qui Curios simulant, et Bacchanalia vivunt.

Pastillos Rufillus olet, Gorgonius hircum. Or rather it is enallage.

 

Impersonal

These impersonals iuvat, decet, delectat, oportet, do govern an accusative case, as me iuvat. Me oportet.

2. Attinet, pertinet, spectat, govern an accusative case with a preposition, as nihil ad me attinet. Spectat ad omnes bene vivere.

3. Paenitet, taedet, miseret, miserescit, pudet, piget, govern an accusative case with a genitive, as paenitet me anteactae vitae. Miseret metui, etc.

 

Of the Adverb

Certain adverbs govern an accusative case like the words whereof they are derived, as propius urbem, proxime castra. So cedo and amabo, as amabo te. Cedo quemvis arbitrum. Cedo dextram.

2. En and ecce, of upbraiding, govern an accusative case only, as en habitum. En animum, et mentem. {N4}

 

Of the Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, and these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like cases, as Socrates docuit Xenophontem et Platonem.

 

Of the Preposition

1. The accusative is governed of such prepositions as do serve to the same, as in etymology.

2. Prepositions in composition govern an accusative case, which they govern in apposition, as praetereo te insalutatum. Adibo templum.

3. Verbs compounded with a, ab, ad, con, de, e, ex, rehearse the same again, being joined to their case by apposition, as in rem publicam incumbe. Postquam excessit ex Ephebis.

4. In, for erga, contra, and ad, signifying to and into.

Sub, for ad, per, ante.

Super, for ultra, do govern an accusative case.

5. The accusative case of the gerund is governed of inter and ante instead of a noun substantive, as inter cenandum. Ante damnandum.

 

Of the Interjection

These interjections, o, heu, proh, govern an accusative case, as me miserum, o is concealed by ellipsis. Heu stirpem invisam. Proh deum, atque hominum fidem.

 

Of the Vocative Case

The vocative case is governed of the interjections o, or proh, most commonly concealed, as Virgil o formose puer nimium ne crede colori.

Proh sancte Iupiter. {n. p.}

 

The Government of The Ablative Case

The ablative case is

put absolutely

 

governed by dependence

 

1. Put Absolutely

1. Words of any quality or property, to the praise or dispraise of thing, are put in the ablative case absolutely after a noun substantive or the verbs substantives sum, forem, existo, as hoc ego sum animo.

2. The measure of length, breadth, or thickness of any thing is put after adjectives sometimes in the ablative case, as liber crassus tribus pollicibus.

3. Words signifying part of time, answering to “when”, are put absolutely in the ablative case, as nocte vigilas, luce dormis.

4. Words signifying continuance of time are sometimes put in the ablative case, as imperavit triennio. Likewise, we say in paucis diebus. De die, de nocte.

5. The space of place is sometimes put in the ablative case, as abest bidui. Spatio or itinere is concealed.

Abest ab urbe quingentis millibus passuum.

6. Proper names of great places, as of countries and isles, are put with a preposition after verbs signifying moving or action in a place, to a place, from a place, or by a place, as vivo in Anglia. Proficiscor ex urbe.

7. The proper name of a place being of the plural number or third declension, answering to the question made by “where”, is often put in the ablative case, as militavit Carthagine. Athenis natus {n. p.} est. Rure is likewise used.

8. The proper name of a place with these signs “from”, or “by”, is put in the ablative case, either without a preposition or with one, as discessit Londino, vel per Londinum Contabrigiam. Eboraco, vel per Eboracum profecturus sum iter.

 

Note

Domus and rus are likewise used, but without a preposition, as abiit domo. Rure reversus est.

9. A noun or pronoun substantive coming with a participle, expressed or understood, is put absolutely after verbs in the ablative case, as rege veniente, hostes fugerunt. Audito rege Doroborniam proficisci. Me impulsore fecit. Salvo honore.

 

Note

Where no participle is expressed, existente, which signifieth being, is understood.

 

Note

The participle is resolved into the verb by these words, dum, quum, quando, si, quanquam, postquam, etc., as dum veniret rex. Postquam audiretur regem Doroborniam proficisci.

The ablative case is governed by dependence of the

substantive

 

adjective

 

verb, with his

participle

adverb

gerunds

 

supines

 

conjunction

 

 

preposition

 

 

Of the Substantive

1. When two substantives come together, belonging to the same thing, they shall be put both in {n. p.} one case, as me impulsore id fecit.

2. Opus and usus signifying “need” or “use” govern an ablative case, as opus est praeparato, “they must needs make hast”. Viginti minis usus est filio.

3. The form or manner of a thing is put after substantives in the ablative case, as nomine Parnassus. Sum tibi natura parens, praeceptor consiliis.

 

Of the Adjective

The adjective governs an ablative by reason of

signification

 

comparison

 

By Reason of Signification

1. All nouns adjectives govern an ablative case signifying the instrument, cause, or manner of doing, as curvus senectute. Pallidus ira.

2. The ablative case of the gerund is used without a preposition, after adjectives signifying the cause or manner of doing, with these signs “of”, “with”, “in”, “by”, as incurvus senescendo. Metuendo trepidus. Defessus ambulando. Or else with one of these prepositions, a, ab, de, e, ex, cum, in, as. Deterrent a bibendo. Ab amando. Cogitat de edendo.

3. The form or manner of a thing is put after adjectives in the ablative case, as egregius forma.

Troianus origine Caesar. Oculo inutilis uno. Facies miris modis pallida.

4. Adjectives signifying fullness, emptiness, plenty, or wanting, do govern most commonly an ablative case, as copiis abundans. Crura thimo plena. Amor melle et felle est saecundissimus. {n. p.}

5. Nouns partitives govern an ablative case with these prepositions, e, de, ex, as est deus e vobis alter. Solus de superis. Unus ex illis.

6. Nouns of number in some sense govern an ablative case with a preposition, as primus ab Hercule. A Iove tertius Aiax.

7. Adjectives of diversity govern an ablative case with a preposition, as alter ab illo. Aliud ab hoc. Diversus ab isto.

8. Dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, fretus, extorris, govern an ablative case, as dignus honore. Virtute praeditus. Captus oculis. Paucis contentus. Tuo iudicio fretus.

9. Comunis, immunis, alienus, do sometimes govern an ablative case with a preposition, as hoc mihi tecum commune est. Immunes ab illis malis sumus. Non alienus a Scevolae studiis.

10. All adjectives signifying any passion or property do govern an ablative case signifying the place where the property or passion is, as aeger pedibus, saucius fronte.

 

By Reason of Comparison

Adjectives of the comparative degree, having “than” orby” after them, cause the word following to be the ablative case, as vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum, i.e. quam aurum, quam virtutes. Uno pede altior.

 

Of the Verb

The ablative case is governed of the verb by reason of

signification

 

composition

 

By Reason of Signification

1. All verbs govern an ablative case of the instrument with the sign “with” before it, as ferit, cum gladio. {n. p.}

2. Likewise all verbs govern an ablative case of the cause or of the manner of doing, and that either without a preposition, most commonly, and sometimes with one, as vehementer ira excanduit. Metu frangitur. Mira celeritate rem peregit. Baccharis prae ebrietate. Summa cum humanitate tractavit hominem.

3. The ablative case of the gerund is in like manner governed, as scribendo disces scribere, and the gerundive with his substantives, as legendis veteribus proficis.

4. Verbs of accusing, condemning, warning, purging, quitting, do sometimes govern an ablative case of the crime, and that either without a preposition, or with one, as si in me inquus es iudex, condemnabo ego eodem te crimine.

5. Uterque, nullus, alter, uter, neuter, alius, ambo, and the superlative degree are governed of such verbs in the ablative case, either with a preposition, or without one, as accusas me homicidii, vel furti, an utroque, sive de utroque. Ambobus, vel de ambobus. Neutro, vel de neutro. De plurimis simul accusaris.

6. Potior and aestimo do oftentimes govern an ablative case, as potior voto. Magno ubique virtus aestimanda est.

7. These verbs, utor, abutor, fruor, fungor, nitor, epulor, dignor, fruiscor, vescor, victito, vivo, gaudeo, laetor, glorior, delector, muto, supersedeo, munero, communico, impertio, impertior, prosequor, afficio, etc.

8. Verbs that have the force of comparison and exceeding do govern an ablative case signifying the measure of exceeding, as deforme ex stimabat, quos dignitate praestaret, ab iis virtutibus superari. {n. p.} Praefero hunc multis gradibus.

9. Mereor, with these adverbs bene, male, melius, peius, optime, pessime, govern an ablative case with a preposition, as de me nunquam bene meritus es.

10. Verbs of plenty or scarceness, filling, emptying, loading, with divers such like, most commonly govern an ablative case, as abundare praeceptis. Carere virtute. Spoliavit me bonis omnibus. Levabo te hoc onere. Such like verbs are expleo, onero, exinanio, vacuo, abundo, egeo, indigeo, expedio, fraudo, orbo, interdico, viduo, abstineo, emungo, discrepo, privo, etc.

11. Verbs of buying, selling, valuing, or prizing, do govern an ablative case, as Aedes centum minis revendit. Emit Paullulo. Multo sanguine, ac vulneribus ea victoria stetit.

12. Vili, paulo, minimo, magno, nimio, dimidio, duplo, are used often without substantives in the ablative case, as redime te captum quam queas minimo. Vili venit triticum.

13. Verbs of comparing govern an ablative with a preposition, as comparo Virgilium cum Homero.

14. Polleo always, and Valeo most commonly, governs an ablative case of the price, as ne obolo valet. Ingenio pollet, cui vim natura negavit.

15. Verbs of receiving, distance, or taking away, govern an ablative case with these prepositions a, ab, e, ex, or de, as accepit literas a Petro.

16. Verbs neuters absolute do often govern an ablative case of their own, or of a near signification, as
diu videor vita vivere. Ire recta via.
{n. p.} Morte obiit repentina.

17. Verbs of arraying, governing two accusative cases, do sometimes change one of them into an ablative, as induo te tunica.

18. Verbs of asking, governing two accusatives, change one of them into an ablative with a preposition, as ipsum obtestemur, veniamque oremus ab ipso. Istam suspicionem ex illis quaere.

19. All verbs neuters signifying any passion or properties, do govern an ablative case signifying the place where the property is, as doleo capite. Aegrotat animo, magis quam corpore.

 

Passive

A verb passive governeth an ablative case of the doer with a preposition, expressed most commonly as Virgilius legitur a me.

2. All other passives govern such cases as their actives do, as accusaris a me furti. Habeberis Ludibrio. Privaberis magistratu. Dedoceberis a me istos mores.

3. Vapulo, vaeneo, liceo, exulo, fio, neuters of the passive signification, have the passive construction, as a praeceptore vapulabis. Ab hoste vaenire. Quid fiet ab illo. Virtus parvo pretio licet omnibus.

4. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, ortus, editus, govern an ablative case, as bona bonis prognata parentibus. Sate sanguine divum. Quo sanguine cretus. Venus orta mari. Terra editus.

 

Impersonal {n. p.}

A verb impersonal passive hath after him an ablative case of all persons singular and plural with a preposition sometimes expressed, but most commonly understood, as quid agitur? Statur. In ignem posita est, stetur, i.e., a, me, te, illo, nobis, vobis, illis, where it might have been made by the active, as quid agis? Sto. In ignem posita est, flent.

 

By Reason of Composition

Most verbs with this sign “from”, compounded with re and se, do govern an ablative case, as redit venatu.

2. A verb compound sometime governeth an ablative case of the preposition, that is compounded with all, as exeo domo. Detrudunt naves scopulo.

 

Of the Adverb

Adverbs of the comparative and superlative degree govern such case as the words that they come of, as propius illo. Omnibus gemmis granum hordei malim, where gemmis is governed of magis in composition.

 

Of the Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, with these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like cases, except the verb doth govern diverse cases.

 

Of the Preposition

The ablative case is governed of prepositions serving to the ablative case, as in etimologie. {n. p.}

2. The preposition in and diverse others are not expressed but understood often by ellipsis, as habeo te loco parentis, i.e., in loco. Rostro cadit esca remisso, i.e., a rostro.

Apparvit illi humana specie, i.e., sub humana specie.

Id tempus creatus est consul, i.e., per id tempus.

Id vero serio triumphat, i.e., propter id.

 

The Regiment of a Verb

The regiment of a verb is whereby the infinitive mood of a verb is said to be governed.

 

 

verb absolute

In the infinitive mood are to be considered the

gerunds

 

supines

 

participles

 

It is

put absolutely

 

governed by dependence on another word

Put Absolutely

 

Of the Verb Absolute

The infinitive mood absolute is put after nouns substantives poetically, instead of the genitive case of the gerund, as studium quibus arva tueri, for tuendi. Tempus erat curva segetes incidere falce, for incidendi.

2. The infinitive mood is construed sometimes with a substantive instead of the preterimperfect tense of the indicative mood singular and plural, {O} as agere gratias, for agebat. Omnes omnia bona dicere, et laudare fortunas meas, etc. Omnes invidere mihi, et mordere clanculum, ego autem flocci pendere.

3. The infinitive mood is put after certain adjectives, as audax omnia perpeti: dignus amari. Facile fieri.

Likewise in stead of the gerund in di, as peritus medicari.

 

Of the Gerund

The gerund in dum hath an absolute construction, as ulcera medicamentis curandum, or curare.

 

Of the First Supine

1. The first supine is commonly put after verbs and participles that signify moving to a place, as eo cubitum. Venio visum.

2. It is sometimes put after other verbs, as coctum ego. Non vapulatum. Conductus sum. Do vaenum. Do filiam nuptum.

 

Note

It signifieth passively in

neutrer passives

 

being construed with *iri and with est, used

 

impersonally

 

Note

The poets do change this supine into the verb absolute by allaeosis, as eo visere. Vado videre.

 

Of the Latter Supine

The latter supine is put after nouns adjectives, as facile factu. Turpe dictu. Dignum spectatu. Which supine may be turned into the infinitive absolute, as turpe dici, dignum spectari.

 

Of the Future in rus

The participle of the future in rus is used after verbs moving to a place, agreeing with the {n. p.} substantive aforegoing, as Galli venerunt legionem oppugnaturi.

 

Governed by Dependence

The infinitive mood is governed by dependence of a

verb

 

conjunction

 

Of a Verb

The infinitive mood is governed of diverse verbs, which being very common, I leave to common observation.

 

Note

The infinitive mood is put sometimes absolutely, the former verb being concealed by ellipsis, as haeccine fieri flagitia? Supple decet, oportet, par est, aequum est, aut aliquid simile. Terence, adeone homines ex amore immutarier, ut non cognoscas eundem esse, supple possibile est.

 

Of a Conjunction

Conjunctions copulatives and disjunctives, and these four quam, nisi, praeterquam, an, couple like moods and tenses, as Petrus et Iohannes praecabantur et decebant.

 

Note

These conjunctions do sometimes couple divers moods and tenses, as et habetur, et referetur tibi a me gratia. {O2}

 

aHellenismus, or Graecismus.

1. Ovid, dum novus est, etiam caepto pugnemus amori, pro cum amore. So Aristophanes, ὀυ μαχο͂υμα? σοι. Frigida pugnabant calidas, humentia sucis, Ovid.

2. Horace, desine curarum, for a curis. Isocrates λϰ͂γε τ? ϖόνων.

3. Horace, alium sapiente, bonoque, for a sapiente. ἀλλὸν σοφ?

4. Terence, ut vobis decet, for vos. ϖςέπ? ὑμιν.

5. Pliny, canum degeneres caudam sub alvum reflectunt, for canes. Nigrae lanarum nullum colorem bibunt, for lanae. Isocrates, τὰ ϰαλὰξώων. σω̅? δ??

6. Ut, signifying “that” or “to the end”, agreeth to the infinitive, instead of the subjunctive. Persius, expectore laevo excutias guttas laetari praeterpidum cor, for ut laetetur. Virgil, pestis acerba boum, pecorique aspergere virus, for ut aspergas. Isocrates, ὥςεϖολλ?ς. Horace, ut melius, quicquid erit, pati, for patiaris.

7. Virgil, expleri nequit mentem. Os, humerosque deo similis. Nuda genu. Faciem mutatus, et ora, for secundum mentem, etc. Isocrates, τἀ τῶυ τςόπν ϰθϰ σϖ?δα??, i. ϰα?. So, caetera laetus. {n. p.} Caetera similis, etc.

8. Athenas missus est erudiendi causa, for ad Athenas. Aθ ?? α?? quo, ποί.

9. Decessit Athenis, for ab Athenis. Aθ? ϰθεν? Unde, ϖοθεν.

10. Carthagini, or Carthagine, or Athenis natus est. So Romae, Londini, etc., for apud Carthaginem, Romam, etc. Aθ?ϰσι? ubi, πōυ.

11. Est, for licet. Virgil, cernere erat, for licebat. Gellius, ut multos videre est pecuniae cupidos. Pliny, de moribus bene sperare est. So the Greeks use ?? for ??. Demostenes, ?? for ??. {O3}

 

Of Prosody or Punctuation

The accidents of syntaxis are * prosody or punctuation, and composition or costruing.

Prosody is whereby sentences consisting of words construed are rightly distinguished and pronounced.

A sentence is imperfect or perfect.

An imperfect sentence doth not absolve a sense by itself.

It is either a proper member of a speech or a parentheses.

The members of a speech are distinguished by a comma or a colon.

A comma is a short member of a sentence pronounced with a little pause and without breathing, thus marked “,” distinctio.

A colon is a chief member, absolving a more perfect sence whereby a perfect sentence is distinguished according to the principal parts. It suspendeth or stayeth the breath, either taken or continued with a longer pause, and it is imperfect, or perfect.

The imperfect is thus marked “;” subdistinctio.

The perfect thus “:” media distinctio.

The parentheses is an intermingled sentence, not of necessity, but for perspicuity or some other respect, this noted “( )”

It must be short and pronounced with such a {n. p.} tone or pronunciation, as it may be discerned from the proper parts of the sentence.

A perfect sentence or period includeth a perfect sence.

It is begun therefore with a capital letter, and endeth with such a pause as the hearer may revolve in mind the sum of the whole period, perfecta, et plena distinctio.

It is simple and directly propounded, and noted with a full point thus “.”.

It is also propounded * indirectly, that is, by way of interrogation, of admiration, and exclamation.

The former is called an interrogative sentence. It is thus noted “?”.

The second may be called an admirative sentence. It is thus noted “!”.

To those add the points whereby words are noted, they are three.

A conjunctive, noting the composition of words which are compounded of whole words as quaecumque, “all-seeing”.

A divisive, noting the division of syllables placed in the top of the syllable divided, as poëta, Nereïdes. Euolüisse.

Apostrophe noting the cutting off of a vowel from the end of a word, thus noted in the top, mult’ ille for multum ille. Tanton’ me, for tantone me. {O4}

 

Of a Period

For the right joining of words and clauses in construction, it is necessary first to know what a period is, with the kinds and parts thereof, so far forth as concerneth this purpose.

A period is a perfect sentence in a speech.

It is either continued or disjoined.

The continued period is absolved without distinction of parts, as nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit.

Terence, magnas vero agere gratias Thais mihi?

O quantum in rebus inane!

The discontinued hath distinction of parts.

It is either simple or mixt.

The simple is parted into members or particles by clauses.

The former is parted by one or more principal members, which are pointed with colon perfect or imperfect, as Cicero, mors honesta saepe vitam quoque turpem exornat: vita turpis ne morti quidem honestae locum relinquit. Idem, utilius est absolvi innocentem; quam nocentem causam non dicere.

The simple is particled also by clauses imperfect or perfect.

An imperfect clause is when a case true or feigned having *many words depending on it, is parted from the verb that it commeth before, or from the word that it governeth, is governed of, or agreeth with, with a comma *, as {n. p.} stomachus calore destitutus; officio coquendi male fungitur. Plurima pro patria, pro se, pro principe dicunt. Cicero, dixit Q. Tadius, homo familiarissimus patris istius. Credere in deum, satis est ad beatam vitam. Colui te, clarissimo genere ortum. Iam inde a prima adolescentia, patris adductus exemplo, bonarum literarum studiis incubuit.

Perfect clauses are of three sorts.

First, when divers parts coming together are concluded all under one verb, adjective, or some other word, and are particled each from other with a comma, as nihil te nocturnum praesidium palatii, nihil urbis vigiliae, nihil timor populi, nihil concursus bonorum omnium, nihil hic munitissimus habendi senatus locus, nihil horum ora, vultusque moverunt?

Plenos omni iniquitate, malitia, dolo, scornations, avaritia, contentione, etc.

De eorum desiderio, luctu, querelis, quotidie tecum simul audiebam. Such may be called zeugmatical clauses.

Secondly, when the whole is first repeated, and then distinguished into his parts, which are parted from the whole, and each from other with a comma, as populus, alii in deliciis, alii in penuria, vivit.

Thirdly, when many members come together with a proper verb, being parted each from other with a comma because the conjunction is * understood, as Virgil, ferte citi flammas, date vela, impellite remos.

Diligentia comparat divitias, negligentia corrumpit animum.

Rem publicam radicitus evertisti, civitatem funditus {n. p.} deiecisti. Such may be called dialytic clauses.

 

Of the Mixt Period

Moreover the discontinued period, besides those members and clauses, is mixed with other particles, and may therefore be called a mixt period.

It standeth of two sentences, viz. the

principal

 

explanative *

The principal setteth down the thing chiefly entended.

The explanative serveth to perfect the principal with his parts, and is therefore diversely joined and intermixed with them.

The explanative is either a proper member of the principal, or an outward particle adjoined unto it.

The outward particle is a parentheses or word in some sort of like nature.

The parentheses is a particle pointed with two half circles, excluding it from the principal, having the construction whole within itself, as Princeps (quia bella miniantur). Hostes (militibus urbem praemunit, et armis).

Words having the force of a parentheses are of two sorts.

First, words of calling, naming, or speaking to, in the vocative case, they are severed from the words following with another, as debeo tibi, vir ornatissime, tot iam nominibus, prorsus, ut non videam, qui solvendo esse possum. Credo ego vos, iudices, mirari, etc.

Secondly, they are notes of explication etc., of which sort are these and such like, id est, quod est, hoc est, scilicet, quasi dicas, sic, ita, ut est, par est, aequum {n. p.} est, ait, inquit, idque hinc est, ita sit, primum, deinde, praeterea, his de causis, huc accedit, etc. Cicero, imo, inquit, abs te satis accipiam.

Ego cum Patavii, hoc est, prope in conspectu meo sis, non accurram ad te?

Ex quo sit, ut ager Arpinas Arpinatum dicatur.

Deinde, ut communibus utatur pro communibus.

The proper member or particle of the principal is relative, or conjunctive.

The relative particle explaneth the principal or his parts with the * pronoun relative, with words of a * relative nature or with words that may be resolved by a relative.

It is particled from the precedent part of the principal, most commonly with a comma and sometime with a colon, as Cicero, ego potissimum surrexi, qui neque aetate, neque ingenio, simi cum iis, qui sedeant comparandus.

Marcus Crassus negabat ullam pecuniam satis esse ei, qui in republicam princeps esse vellet, cuius fructibus exercitum alere non posset.

Words of a relative nature are qualis, quantus, quot, quatenus, quam, quo, quanto, ubi, unde, etc., whose antecedents are most commonly understood by anacoluthon, as et, quantum in ipso est, disturbat vitae societatem.

Non pol, qui quenquam plus amem aut diligam, eo feci.

Sive adeo digna res est, ubi nervos intendas tuos.

Words that may be resolved by a relative, Terence, ibi tum matri parvolam puellam dono quidam mercator dedit, ex Attica hinc abreptam, i.e., quae abrepta fuit.

Dixit Q. Tadius, homo familiarissimus patris {n. p.} istius, i.e. qui erat etc.

The conjunctive particle explaneth the principal and his parts with certain conjunctions and adverbs, or with words that may be resolved by the same, as fauste, precor, gelida quando pecus omne sub umbra ruminat, antiquos paulum recitemus amores.

O Thais, Thais, utinam esset mihi pars aequa amoris tecum, ac pariter fieret, ut, aut hoc tibi doleret itidem, ut mihi dolet, aut ego abs te factum nihili, penderem.

Words that may be resolved by a conjunction, etc.

Rege veniente, hostes fugerunt, i.e., dum, cum, postquam etc., veniret rex.

Colui te, clarissimo genere ortum, i.e., quia ortus es, etc.

The explanative sentence is also

continued

 

 

parted into members

 

 

particled by clauses

 

 

mixt of

principals

 

 

explanatives

 

The affection of explanative sentence is their placing.

They are placed sometimes before the principal or his parts, sometimes after, sometimes in the middle.

Quibus in rebus ipsi interesse non possumus in his operae nostre vicaria fides amicorum supponitur.

Qui mihi discipulos, puer, es, cupis atque doceri, huc ades, haec animo concipe dicta tuo.

Quot capita, tot sensus.

At tu, finesti ne sim tibi muneris autor, nate caue: dum resque sinit, tua corrige vota. {n. p.}

 

A Table of the Period

A period is

continued

 

 

 

 

 

disjoined

simple
parted into members

 

 

 

 

particled by clauses

imperative

 

 

 
 

perfect

zeugmatical

 

 

 

 
 

proleptical

 

 

 

 

 

 

dialytic

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

mixt which stand of sentences

principal

 

 

 

 

 

explanative

a

proper member

relative which explaneth

by the pronoun relative words of like nature

 

 

 

 
conjunctive which explaneth by
conjunction, and certain adverbs. Words that may be resolved by the same

 

 

 

outward particle

parentheses

 

 

 

 

 
words of like nature
words of calling or speaking to

 

 

 

 

of explication, transition, etc.

{n. p.}

 

Of Construing

Composition or construing is whereby words and clauses, rhetorically disposed in a period, are reduced into a grammatical placing or order.

In grammatical construing, first of all, the nominative case is placed before, whether it be true or feigned, and the verb in the second place.

It is either put alone, or hath other words depending on it.

 

The Nominative Put Alone

Omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus amori. Grammatically, amor vincit omnia, etc.

In deum credere, satis est ad beatam vitam. Grammatically, credere in deum, est satis, etc.

 

Exception One

If either a question be asked, or the verb of the imperative mood, then either the verb or the sign of the verb is put in the first place, as Terence, ubi scelus est, qui me perdidit?, “Where is the varlet, that hath undone me?”.

Venit ne rex? “Doth the king come?”.

Ama tu, “love thou”. Amato ille, “let him love”.

 

Exception Two

Likewise, when this sign “it” orthere” cometh {n. p.} before the English of the verb, as est liber meus, “it is my book”. Venit ad me quidam, “there came one to me”.

 

Note

If the verb be impersonal, the signe “it” orthere” supplieth the room of the nominative case, as oportet me legere Virgilium, “it behooveth me to read Virgil”.

 

The Nominative with Other Words

The nominative case hath depending on it.

1. Sometimes an adjective only, as blandi homines saeps fallunt.

2. Sometimes besides the adjective another substantive, as pater meus vir amat me puerum.

Spes impunitatis, est pecandi illecebra.

3. Sometimes * many cases and * words, that is, when an adjective or participle agreeing with the nominative doth govern other cases after it, with their adjectives, adverbs, and preposition with their casual words, as Ovid, est via sublimis caelo manifesta sereno.

Voce novae captus custos Iunonis artis, Argus ait, etc.

Ille summum fidei toties amissae incommodum satis expertus, etc.

 

Of the Verb

The verb is either put alone, or hath other words depending on it.

 

Put alone.

Homo ridet. Tu dives ludis. Ego pauper laboro.

 

With other words. {n. p.}

The verb hath depending on it.

1. Sometimes an * adverb, as libenter disce. Haud congrue loqueris.

2. Sometimes besides the adverb an infinitive mood, as diu taceri non potest.

3. The verb or his infinitive do most commonly govern an accusative after them, because most verbs be transitive, percontatorem fugito.

 

Note

The accusative with this English “that” is placed before the infinitive mood in construing, because they supply the place of the nominative case and the verb finite, as gaudeo te bene valere. “I am glad that thou art well”.

4. Sometimes the verb hath diverse cases with their adjectives and adverbs immediately depending on it, as adspicit hunc Pentheus oculis. Speras hoc tibi laudi fore. Dedit vestem purpuream mihi non poscenti pignori sua sponte, te praesente, propria manu.

 

Note

The accusative in construing is next after the adverb, placed immediately after the verb, and then the * dative, lastly the ablative. But the genitive and the case by apposition next after their former substantives.

5. Sometimes it hath many * cases, or words depending on it, that is, when an adjective or participle agreeing with the accusative do govern other cases after them, with their adjectives, adverbs, and prepositions, with their casual words, as ille per Aonias fama celeberrimus urbes. {n. p.} Irreprehensa dabat populo responsa petenti. Ovid, nam duo magnorum viridi coeuntia sylva corpora serpentum baculi violaverat ictu. Ignemque vomentes ambrosiae succo saturos praesepibus altis quadrupedes ducunt.

Ille summum toties violatae fidei incommodum satis expertus, dedit mihi non poscenti quicquam ominò vestem purpuream pignori sponte sua, te praesente, propria manu. Grammatically, ille expertus satis summum incommodum fidei violatae toties, dedit purpuream vestem sponte sua mihi non poscenti quicquam omnino pignori propria manu, te praesente.

 

The Construing of Words in a Mixt Period

In a mixt period the principal sentence and his parts, must be separated from the explanative, and the explanatives each from other, observing well what part or parts of the principal, or of themselves, they explaie, and then place them all in order, as is aforesaid.

 

Of the Parentheses

The proper members of the period must be seperated from the parentheses, and grammatically placed, as Princeps (quia bella miniantur hostes) militibus urbem praemunit, et armis.

Princeps praemunit urbem militibus, et armis (quia hostes miniantur bella).

Words of calling or speaking to are construed in the first place, as magnum est hoc, vir ornatissime, humanitatis, et amoris tui in me argumentum. {P}

Vir ornatissime, hoc est magnum argumentum humanitatis, et amoris tui in me.

Words of explication etc., are in construing placed next after the words that they express.

 

Of Relative Particle or Clause

The antecedent or principal member must be first separated from it, and the words grammatically placed, then in like sort the relative particle, as ita, quod mihi consuevit in caeteris caussis adiumento esse, in quoque in hac causa deficit. Grammatically, ita, id deficit quoque in hac causa, quod consuevit esse mihi adiumento in caeteris caussis.

Hoc tibi persuasum esse cupio, quaecumque a vetere necessitudine expectari officia solent, ea tibi, a me, siqua tui dabitur facultas ornandi, praesto semper futura.

Cupio hoc persuasum esse tibi, ea officia futura semper praesto tibi a me, quaecumque solent expectari a veteri necessitudine, siqua facultas ornandi tui dabitur.

When the relative may be englished by what as it goes before the antecedent, so is it also construed before it, as Cicero, forsitan quaeratis, qui sit iste terror et quae tanta formido, quae tot, ac tantos viros impediat, etc. “Peradventure you may demand what that terror may be”, etc.

Quae duae res in civitate plurium uni possunt, eae contra nos ambae faciunt hoc tempore. “What two things can most prevail in a city”, etc.

 

Note

Where note that in construing the words of the relative particle, the relative of what case {n. p.} soever, must be placed before. If it be the genitive case, the other substantive whereof it dependeth is most conveniently * joined with it. And what words soever depend on the relative, they are placed in construing before the nominative and the verb, as faelix, quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum.

Princeps non est, cuius fructibus exercitus ali non potest, etc.

Quem in carcerem coniectum, et compedibus devinctum plangebant omnes. Cuius patriam Prienem cum cepisset hostis, etc.

 

Of the Conjunctive Particle

The principal member or clause must be separated from it and the words grammatically placed, then in like sort place the words of the conjunctive particle, as Terence, ait, fidem habeat, se praepositum iri tibi apud me, ac non id metuat, ne, ubi acceperim, sese relinquam, velle se illam mihi dare. Grammatically, ait se velle dare illam mihi, si habeat fidem, se praepositum iri tibi apud me, ac non metuat id, ne relinquam sese, ubi acceperim.

Ovid, tunc etiam quae me subiectis excipit undis, ne ferar in praeceps, Tethis solet ipsa vereri.

The principall sentence, tunc etiam Tethis ipsa solet vereri, whose parts are explained.

Tunc etiam Tethys ipsa, quae excipit me vndis subiectis, solet vereri, ne ferar in praeceps.

 

Note

In copulative and disjunctive particles, the first copulative or disjunctive is construed in {P2} the first place, then the other, as Ovid, a dextra, laevaque dies, et mensis, et annus, saeculaque, et positae spatiis aequalibus horae.

 

Note

The copulative and disjunctive sometimes redound by polysyndeton, as Athamasque, Thoasque, Pelidesque.

Aut face, aut, si non vis, tace. Aut sedeat, aut abeat.

 

Examples in Mixt Periods

 

Optarem equidem, ut hae populares tempestates et seditionum procellae, quibus patria nostra (tempore Edouardi regis Sexti) sordidissimorum hominum scelere, et perfidia perculsa, et afflicta fuit, aut nunquam contigessent, aut (si fieri possit) illa memoria penitus ex omnium mentibus excinderetur.

 

The Resolution of the Period and Construction of the Words

The principal member.

Optarem equidem, explained by the conjunctive particle, ut hae populares tempestates, et procellae seditionum, quibus, etc.

The first part of this explanation viz. the nominative with his dependents, is explained by the copulative particle, Et procellae seditionum and both are explained by the relative particle, quibus patria nostra percussa, et afflicta fuit scelere. et perfidia sordidissimorum hominum.

The first part hereof, i.e. the nominative with his dependents, is explained by the copulative particle zeugmatically, Et afflicta fuit. {n. p.}

The second part, scelere, is explained by the copulative zeugmatically, et perfidia perditissimotum hominum, and both are explained by the parentheses, tempore Eduardi regis sexti.

The second part of the principal explanative, i.e. the verb with his dependents, aut contigessent nunquam, is explained by the coniunctive particle, aut memoria illarum excinderetur penitus ex mentibus omnium, which is explained by the parentheses, si posset fieri.

 

Resolution, and Construction

Sed, quoniam praeterita mutari non possunt, ut haec macula proditionis a perniciosissimis civibus patriae nostrae impressa, altius insedit in populi Norfolciensis nomine, ad memoriam sceleris sempiternam infixa, quam ut penitus deleri, aut prorsus extirpari queat, facile patior oblatam mihi hanc huius historiolae conscribendae facultatem, ut omnes intelligant, quibus initiis hi tanti tumultus excitati sunt, ac qua tandem virtute compressi: penitusque perspiciant vulnera illa, ac seditionum scelera, partiae nostrae, non a bonis viris, et fortibus inflicta, sed a desperatorum hominum flagitiosissimis gregibus inusta fuisse.

The principal sentence, continued. Sed patior facile hanc facultatem scribendi huius historiolae oblatam mihi.

The first part hereof, sed, is explained by the conjunctive particle causal, quoniam praeterita non possunt mutari, which is explained by the {P3} copulative particle standing of two imperfect clauses.

1. Et haec macula proditionis impressa patriae nostrae civibus perniciosissimis, insedit altius in nomine populi Norfolciensis

2. Infixa ad memoriam sempiternam sceleris

Which are explained by the redditives particle zeugmatically, quam ut queat deleri penitus, which is further explained by the disjunctive particle aut extirpari prorsus.

The second part hereof, facile patior, etc., is explained:

1. By the causal particle ut omnes intelligant initia, which is explained by the relative particle, quibus initiis hi tanti tumultus excitati sunt, and this by the copulative particle, ac qua virtute compressi tandem.

2. By the copulative particle, perspiciantque penitus illa vulnera, which is explained by the copulative particle zeugmatically an imperfect clause, ac scelera seditionum, inflicta fuisse patriae nostrae, explained:

1. By the adverb of denying, non a bonis viris, which is explained by the copulative particle et fortbius

2. By discretive particle sed inusta a gregibus flagitiosissimis desperatorum hominum. {n. p.}

 

Itaque, cum perdilectus, et fidelis noster fanulus Alexander Ienkinson, qui literas nostras perfert, cum bona venia, favore, et gratia nostra, hoc Angliae nostrae regnum excedere. Et in Persiam usque, vestrasque alias ditiones (dei benignitate) penetrare constituerit. Hoc illius institutum perlaudabile quidem, grato nostro favore persequi, et promovere studuimus: id quod eo libentius facimus, quoniam hoc eius propositum, ex honesto studio commercii constituendi potissimum, cum vestris subditis, aliisque peregrinis hominibus, ad regna vestra confluentibus, omnino exortum sit.

The principal sentence particled with imperfect clauses.

Itaque tum studuimus persequi hoc institutum illius, per laudabile quidem, grato nostro favore.

The first part, itaque tum, is explained by the relative particle, cum perdilectus, et fidelis etc. The first part whereof, viz. the nominative with his dependents being an imperfect clause. Cum Alexander Ienkinson noster perdilectus famulus, is explained by the copulative particle, et fidelis, and both are explained by the relative particle, qui perfert nostras literas.

The second part, viz. the verb zeugmatically with his dependents, constituerit excedere hoc regnum nostrae Angliae, which is particled with two imperfect clauses:

1. Cum bona venia

2. Favore, zeugmatically, which are explained by the copulative {P4} et gratia nostra, and then explained by the copulative particle et penetrare usque in Persiam, which is also explained by the copulative vestrasque alias ditiones, which are explained by the parentheses, (benignitate dei).

The second part of the principal, studuimus persequi, which is explained by the copulative, et promovere.

The third part of the principal, hoc institutum illius perlaudabile quidem, nostro grato favore, both which parts are explained by the relative, id quod nos facimus eo libentius, which is explained by the causal part being particled with imperfect clauses quoniam hoc eius propositum exortum sit omnino. Ex honesto studio constituendi commercii potissimam, cum vestris subditis, which is explained by the copulative particle, aliisque peregrinis hominibus, particled with an imperfect clause, confluentibus ad vestra regna.

 

Tyresias (ut refert Ovidius, ni fallor) iter illac, sic sors tulit, cuius (licet vates) ignarus erat, habiturus, violaverat, quanta vi patuit, duo corpora {n. p.} magnorum serpentum, nigro tumida veneno, eoquem mortifero, quale est omnium in regionibus, quae sitae sunt in occidentalibus mundi plagis, coeuntia, sicut et caetera animantia verno tempore coeunt, viridi sylva, quae graminosa fuit, ac arbustis, fruticibis, vepribusque plena.

The principal sentence particled with imperfect clauses.

Tyresias habiturus iter illac, violaverat duo corpora magnorum serpentum, nigro tumida veneno, coeuntia viridi Sylva.

The first part hereof, Tyresias habiturus iter illac, is explained by the conjunctive particle adverb sic sors tulit, which is explained by the relative partile cuius erat ignarus, which is explained by the parentheses (licet vates).

The second part, violaverat, is explained by the relative particle quanta vi potuit.

The third part, duo corpora magnorum serpentum, tumida nigro veneno, explained by the copulative particle eoque mortifero, explained by the relative particle quale est omnium serpentum in regionibus, explained by the relative particle quae sita sunt in occidentatibus mundi.

The fourth part, coeuntia, explained by the {n. p.} conjunctive particle adverb, sicut erat caetera animantia coeunt verno tempore.

The first part, viridi sylva, explained:

1. By the relative particle quae graminosa fuit.

2. By the copulative particle which stands of two perfect clauses zeugmatically, ac plena arbusis, fruticibus, explained by the copulative particle vepribusque. All which parts are explained by the parentheses (ut refert Ovidius), explained by the exceptive particle nifallor.

 

Quare, cum tibi maximas ago gratias, quod ad me scripseris, quodque mihi haud paullo plus, quam agnoscere debeam, tribuere videaris: quippe cum ea referas ad iudicium meum, quorum ego te, si arbitrii mei res esset, Aristarchum libenter constituerem: tum vero sic velim existimes, siquis est, qui tuae laudi faveat, qui tuam praestantem doctrinam in ore habeat, qui denique tua causa summa et cupiat, et curet, eum esse me daturumque operam, ut animum aliquando res ipsa declaret.

 

The principal sentence, dialytic, quare cum ago maximas gratias tibi, explained by the causal particle, quod scripseris ad me, explained by the copulative particle quodque videaris tribuere mihi plus haud paulo, explained:

1. By the elective particle quam debeam agnoscere. {n. p.}

2. By the causal particle quippe cum referas ad meum iudicium ea, explained by the relative particle quorum Aristarchum ego constituerem libenter te, explained by the exceptive particle si esset res mei arbitrii.

The second copulative particle explaining the principal is an imperfect clause, tum vero velim existimes sic, me esse cum, explained:

1. By the conditional particle si quis est, explained by three relative perfect clauses, qui faveat tuae laudi; qui habeat tuam praestantem doctrinam in ore; qui denique cupiat, explained by the copulative particle et curet omnia summa tua causa.

2. By the copulative daturum que operam, explained by the causal, or perfective particle, ut res ipsa declaret aliquando animum.

 

Sed profecto, si me putas ab in eunte aetate iis artibus, ac studiis non mediocriter esse delectatum, quibus ad humanitatem animus excolitur: aequiorem te mihi esse oportet, nec suspicari, quia rarius ad te scribam, non ideo me tibi, quas debeo, gratias habere, nec diligere, et amplecti diligentiam, industriamque tuam, quam quotidie locas in antiquitate colligenda cuius ego maiorem officii partem libenter acceptam refero benevolentiae erga me tuae.

 

The principal sentence, {n. p.} sed profecto oportet te aequiorem esse mihi, explained:

1. By the conditional particle, si putas me non delectatum esse mediocriter ab ineunte aetate iis artibus, which is explained by the copulative particle ac studiis, which are explained by the relative particle quibus animus excolitur ad humanitatem.

2. By the copulative particle nec suspicari me non habere ideo gratias tibi, whose parts are explained: the first part, nec suspicari, explained by causal particle quia scribam rarius ad te. The second part, me non habere ideo gratias tibi, explained:

1. By the relative quas debeo.

2. By the copulative nec diligere diligentiam tuam, whose parts are explained: the first part, nec diligere, explained by the copulative particle et amplecti. The second part, diligentiam, explained by the copulative particle industriamque tuam, explained by the relative particle, quam locas quotidie in colligenda antiquitate, all which are explained by the relative particle maiorem partem cuius officii ego refero libenter {n. p.} acceptam benevolentiae tuae erga me.

 

Valla. Cardinals, from Whence Other Numbers Are Derived

Unum, duo, tria, quatuor, quinque, sex, septem, octo, novem, decem, undecim, duodecim, tredecim, quatuordecim, quindecim, sexdecim, or sedecim, septendecim, octodecim, or duodeviginti, novendecim, or undeviginti, viginti unum et viginti, duo et viginti, and so to * an hundred, setting the lesser number before, with the copulative. Otherwise, viginti unum, viginti duo, etc. Triginta, triginta unum, triginta duo, etc. Quadringinta, quinquaginta, sexaginta, septuaginta, octoginta, nonaginta, centum. Bis centum, ter centum, etc., or ducenti, ducentae, ducenta; trecenti, trecentae, trecenta; quadraginta, quinginta, sexinginta, or sexcenta, septinginta, octinginta, noninginta, or nonginta, mille. Duo millia, tria millia, etc. Triginta millia, quadraginta millia, etc. Centum millia, bis centum millia, etc. Mille millium.

 

Ordinals, whereby Things Are Numbered According to Their Order

Primus, secundus, tertius, quartus, quintus, sextus, septimus, octavus, nonus, decimus, undecimus, duodecimus, decimus tertius, decimus quartus, decimus quintus, decimus sextus, decimus septimus, decimus octavus, decimus nonus, vicessimus, and vigessimus. Vicessimus primus, vivessimus secundus, etc. Tricessimus, quadragessimus, quinquagessimus, sexagessimus, septuagessimus, octogessimus, nonagessimus, centessimus, primus, secundus, etc. And tricessimus, etc., quadragessimus, and quinquagessimus, etc. Ducentissimus, trecentessimus, quadringentessimus, sexecentessimus, septingentessimus, octingentessimus, {n. p.} noningentessimus, millessimus. Millessimus primus, secundus, etc. Millessimus centessimus, ducentessimus, etc.

 

Numbering of Things According to Time

Semel, bis, ter, quater, quinquies, sexies, septes, octies, novies, decies, undecies, duodecies, tredecies, quatuordecies, quindecies, sexdecies, decies septies, decies octies, decies novies, vicies. Tricies, quadragies, quinquagies, sexagies, septuagies, octogies, nonagies, centies. Ducenties, trecenties, quadringenties, quingenties, sexcenties, septingenties, octingenties, nongenties, millies, semel millies, bis millies, etc., decies millies, vicies, tricies, etc.

 

Distributive Numbers Noting the Partition of Things

Singuli, bini, terni, quaterni, quini, seni, septeni, octoni, noveni, deni, undemi, duodeni, ternideni, quaternideni, quinideni, senideni, septendeni, octonideni, novenideni, viceni, viceni singuli, etc. Triceni, quadrageni, quinquageni, sexageni, septuageni, octogeni, nongeni, vel nonageni, centeni. Duceni, triceni, quadringeni, quingeni, sexceni, sextingeni, octingeni, noningeni, put for ducenteni, etc.

In prose these are used most commonly in the plural number. In verse they are used often in the singular.

Numbers in arius, note not the multiplication of themselves, but the number of other things not named, as centenarius lapis, “not an hundreth fold”, or double, but of an hundreth pound weight. Homo Centenarius, not an hundredth fold, but an hundred years.

Primarius, binarius, ternarius, quaternarius, quinarius, senarius, septenarius, octonarius, novenarius, {n. p.} denarius, undenarius, duodenarius, tredenarius, quaterdenarius, quindenarius, sedenarius, septendenarius, octodenarius, novendenarius, vicenarius, tricenarius, etc., quadragenarius, etc., quinquagenarius, etc., sexagenarius etc., septuagenarius, etc., octogenarius, etc., nonagenarius, etc., centenarius, ducentenarius, etc., trecentenarius, etc., quadringenarius, etc., quingenarius, etc., septingentarius, etc., octingenarius, etc., noningenarius, etc., millenarius.

 

Liber et Autor ad Lectorem.

Ignotum, lector, vultu dignore sereno,

Nec dubia rugas nectito fronte caras.

Ipse fui quondam labyrinthus, corpus opacum,

Attica quo pubes saepe sepulta fuit,

Flexibus ambiguis, variis anfractibus illam,

Detinui, nulla noverat arte viam.

Nunc postquam logici ductu Minoia fili,

Eruit e tenebris, undique porta patet.

Sum domus, haud carcer. Non est, hic sudor, et angor,

Lascivire licet, qua laborastis ad huc.

Scande puer, facile est, facile est ascende puelle,

Non tibi nodus adest, nec tibi dumus obest.

De viridi fusim stillant hac ilice mella,

Quaelibet et pomis pendula virga gemit.

Hoc capias horto calathis tibi lilia plenis,

Suaves hinc violas, carpe, puelle, rosas.

Artis ad oceanum libeat penetrare refusum?

Nil te Maeandrum posse iuvare putes.

Effluit, et refluit, redit, it, sinuante Colubro

Torquetur, spiris voluitur inque fuis.

Neve petas Ararim, dubio quae flumine fertur,

Lento progressu stare videtur Arar.

Porrigor in rectum, recta protendor in aequor,

Ceu rapidus Rhodanus provehor amne meo. {n. p.}

Remige non opus est, propria namque arte ferere,

Ars mea natura est, detrahe vela noto.

Qui me non vectus longis erroribus actus,

Allisus scopulis exul ab arte fuit.

Arsque probatur iners, quae non comitante Minervae

Traditur, at cerebro pendeat orsa suo.

Grammaticus vere non est, sed grammaticaster,

Naturae ignorans haurier omne penu.

Linacer est nostras clarus, clarissimus atqui

Lilius est vostras, laurea serta gerat.

Si tibi profuerim, nihil est plus ipse quod opto,

Haec operae spero praemiae dignae meae.

Ventosam stolide laudem non aucupor ullam,

Certamen sophiae stultius essereor.

Adiecit stimulos mihi nec spes dira lucelli,

Psyttachus hinc caepit discere χαἶρε suum.

Quod mihi compertum est, quodque experientia certa

Comprobat hic doceo iam meliore via

Invidiae non sum correptus tabe veneni,

Nec mea contorquet viscera livor iners.

Non prosunt domino, quae fiunt omnibus artes

Communes, artis saepe professor ait.

At Θεομίμεῖϑαι doctos dice, resonoque

Regedo cogi, lege deique regi.

Hac sum confiteor sola ratione coactus

Tradere typis, quae commoda certa ferant.

Si quid tu melius cognoscas optime lector,

Et me participies antipelargus eris.

Molle meum pectus fera ne pertentet Erinnys,

Nec noceant linquae lurida tela malae.

Non mihi sum soli natus sed ut omnibus essem

Utilis, auxilii debita solvo mei.

Siquid profuerim, mihi perdilecta iuventus,

Gaudeo: tune animo percipe grata pari.

FINIS.

Editorial notes

 The word “syntagma”, now rarely used, indicates “A methodically arranged collection of statements, propositions, doctrines, etc.; a systematic treatise” (“syntagma, n.” OEDOnline. Oxford University Press, December 2022. Web. 2 March 2023.), thus referring to the compendium of grammatical rules collected by the author Thomas Granger.

Editorial notes

 William Lily’s grammar book, generally called Lily’s Grammar, was first published in 1540. It is the first English textbook, written in English and in Latin, used in English grammar Schools to teach Latin.

Editorial notes

Thomas Granger matriculated in 1598 at the Peterhouse College in Cambridge, where he probably came in touch with Ramist and Puritan theories.

Editorial notes

Thomas Granger (baptized in 1578, died in 1627), matriculated as a sizar at Peterhouse college, Cambridge, in 1598; he graduated BA in 1602, and MA in 1605. He was ordained deacon at Lincoln, admitted as curate of Epworth, and he became vicar of Butterwick, Lincolnshire, in November, where he became teacher. Between 1616 and 1621 he published different religious works, among them seven sermons, a grammar book, or edition of Lily's grammar (Syntagma grammaticum, 1616), a practical Ramist logic textbook for country preachers (Syntagma logicum, 1620), and a commentary on Ecclesiastes (1621).

Editorial notes

 Thomas Dawson was a well-known London printer. His business was based especially on the publishing of scientific treatises and religious commentaries, he was in fact one of the first printers to spread Calvin’s writings.

Editorial notes

 John Leventhorpe is the dedicatee and patron of this and other Granger’s works. Granger worked as tutor for this Hertfordshire family.

Editorial notes

 Artaxerxes II was the King of Persia, named “Mnemon” by some Greek authors due to his good memory.

Editorial notes

 In a seventeenth-century English book we can read about Sinaeta: “a certain Persian named Sinaeta, meeting King Artaxerxes Mnemon far from his House, being much troubled in mind, that he had nothing to present him with”. In: The signal loyalty and devotion of God's true saints and pious Christians {…} By William Prynne Esq; late bencher, and reader of Lincolns-In. London: printed for Edward Thomas, at the Adam and Eve in Little-Britain, 1680.

Editorial notes

 Reference to Terence’s Eunuchus.

Editorial notes

 The meaning of this word is “with frequent hiatus”, that is, characterized by frequent pauses.

Editorial notes

 Gnatho is a character from Terence’s Eunuchus, which became symbol for an excessive flattery. The word comes from the “Greek γνάθων, used as the proper name of a parasite” and it can refer to “A person resembling the Gnatho of Terence; a parasite, sycophant.” (“gnatho, n.” OED Online. Oxford University Press, December 2022. Web. 2 March 2023.).

Editorial notes

 Meaning “familiarity breeds contempt”, it is a sentence by Publilius Syrius (Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.74).

Editorial notes

 A repeated exercise, an intellectual trial to improve learning.

Editorial notes

 The author is here referring to the Greek philosopher Aristotle, who expresses the concept of art imitating nature in his 4th-century BC work Physics, which contains writings about nature and natural philosophy.

Editorial notes

 A reference to Galen, De spermate, twelfth century, whose incipit is “Sperma hominis descendit ex humore totius corporis”. In De spermate or De duodecim signis vel sortis, the children’s conception varies with the different times of a day, where different hours are scanned following the humoral theory and its four humors: blood, phlegm, yellow bile and black bile. Conception is altered a stellis et non a parentibus, by the stars and not by parents, thus introducing an astrological aspect, related to stars, geography, and seasons.

Editorial notes

 Literally it means “loins’ excrement”, but loins can be referred to the “loins as the seat of sexual excitement”.

Editorial notes

 “A matrice which nurtures only”. It refers to the platonic chora,also mentioned in Aristotle’s Metaphysics, that is the seat of creation and conception continually reproducing.

Editorial notes

 “A matrice which not only nurtures, but feeds”.

Editorial notes

 “Common notions”, or axioms.

Editorial notes

 In the OED we read: “A name for that function or department of conscience which serves as a guide for conduct; conscience as directive of one's actions” (“synteresis, n.” OED Online. Oxford University Press, March 2023. Web. 10 March 2023.). This is a philosophical and theological concept about man’s ability to consciously discern the good from the evil, which was used, among the others, by Saint Jerome and Thomas Aquinas.

Editorial notes

 Meaning “clear light”. Lucretius writes about Epicure in De rerum natura: “E tenebris tantis tam clarum extollere lumen”.

Editorial notes

 This Latin proverb was widely used. Even Thomas More uses it in the letter of “The translator to the Gentle Reader” contained in his 1516 Utopia: “But as the Latin proverb sayeth: The hasty bitch bringeth forth blind whelps”.

Editorial notes

 Meaning “for not to go forward is to go backwards”.

Editorial notes

Augustine, De trinitate, III.17 All the following quotes, unless otherwise specified, are taken from the online database The Latin Library. Not every quote mentioned by Granger has been found.

Editorial notes

 These words can be found in Francis Bacon’s Sermones fideles, LIV. { = English LVI} De Officio Iudicis, 4. “Etenim (ut ait Scriptura) non colliguntur uvae ex spinis”.

Editorial notes

 Macrobius, Saturnalia, II.4.30. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

"And to create the strong from the strong”.

Editorial notes

 “They have the advantages of males and females”.

Editorial notes

 Proteus is a Greek sea god, or god of rivers and oceans. He is a prophetic god marked by changeability, versatility and mutability.

Editorial notes

 Vertumnus is a god of seasons, thus a terrestrial god of change, of plants growth, gardens and trees.

Editorial notes

 “He who plants”.

Editorial notes

 “He who waters”.

Editorial notes

 Sisyphus, in Greek mythology, is a character who has been condemned to roll forever a giant rock up to a hill, and once reached the top start again for the eternity.

Editorial notes

 Probably a mistake for “her”.

Editorial notes

 “Sketched in outline, shadowy, consisting of lines”.

Editorial notes

 “And so now, like elms, fleeting spirits scold their fools”.

Editorial notes

 Proverb meaning “as many heads, as many opinions”.

Editorial notes

 “From God and Nature, and not from fantasy or custom”.

Editorial notes

 After the long prefatory letter written by Granger, the proper grammar book starts at this point.

Glosses

 Prosody of a letter.

Glosses

 Prosody of syllables.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, VI.195.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, IV.126.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.499.

Editorial notes

 This adjective and some of the following uses of the same word have been corrected and changed from “beruis” to “brevis” both here and in the semi-diplomatic edition, being a clear repeated misprint.

Glosses

 a.

Glosses

 b. c.

Glosses

 d. t. e.

Glosses

 i.

Glosses

 l.

Glosses

 n.

Glosses

 o.

Glosses

r. 

Glosses

 As.

Glosses

 Es.

Glosses

 Is.

Glosses

 Eis.

Glosses

 Is.

Glosses

 Os.

Glosses

 Us.

Glosses

 Ous.

Glosses

 v.

Editorial notes

 “An explanatory note or comment; spec. an ancient exegetical note or comment upon a passage in a Greek or Latin author” (“scholia” in “"scholion, n." OED Online. Oxford University Press, March 2023. Web. 2 June 2023.”).


Glosses

 a. b. c. d.

Glosses

 e.

Glosses

 f.

Glosses

 g.

Glosses

 h.

Glosses

 i.

Glosses

 k.

Glosses

 l.

Glosses

 m.

Glosses

 n.

Glosses

 o.

Glosses

 p.

Glosses

 q.

Glosses

 r. s.

Glosses

 a.

Glosses

 b. c.

Glosses

 d.

Glosses

 e.

Glosses

 f. g. h.

Glosses

 i. k.

Glosses

 l.

Glosses

 m.

Glosses

 n. o.

Glosses

 p.

Glosses

 q. r. s.

Glosses

 t. u.

Glosses

 x. y.

Glosses

 z.

Glosses

 a. b. c.

Glosses

 d. e.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, VI.670-1.

Editorial notes

 Lucan, Pharsalia, I.8.

Editorial notes

 In this section, the last letter of the words in each line is not readable in the original text that has been consulted.

Glosses

Casus dicitur quia pereum vovarie cadit.

Glosses

Obliquus de, quia obliquatur in contexturam aliorum verborum.

Editorial notes

 The examples mentioned in this section are taken from Lily’s Grammar.

Editorial notes

 Ennius, Annales, XVII.428. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Naevius, Bellum punicum; VII. 44-6. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, XI.801-2. In The Latin Library text we read “aurae” instead of “auras”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.30.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.7. In The Latin Library edition we read “Ulixi” instead of “Ulissi”.

Glosses

im.

Glosses

im, and em.

Glosses

 i.

Glosses

 e, i.

Editorial notes

 “Chenix (Lat. chaenix) a measure containing a Sextary and half, or about two pints and a quarter”, Glossographia, or, A dictionary interpreting all such hard words of whatsoever language now used in our refined English tongue with etymologies, definitions and historical observations on the same : also the terms of divinity, law, physick, mathematicks and other arts and sciences explicated, by Thomas Blount, London: Printed by Thomas Newcombe for George Sawbridge, 1661.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, 287. “Ei(u)s anui’ causa”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, IV.198

Editorial notes

 Terence, Adelphoe, I.63. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, II.365. “Nil ornati, nil tumulti”.

Editorial notes

 The running head has been copied and modernized because of its correspondence to the title of the scheme included here by Granger.

Editorial notes

  The word could not be deciphered.

Editorial notes

  The word could not be deciphered.

Editorial notes

  The word could not be deciphered.

Glosses

a for the most part.

Glosses

Solito, used always after comparatives, as plus solito.

Glosses

a Which it as signifieth.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.292-3. “Remo cum fratre Quirinus, iura dabunt”.

Glosses

 a Relatives of quantity, and quality.

Editorial notes

 Here the abbreviation “i.” probably refers to idem to show the use of repeated adjectives in the same word.

Glosses

 Persona, i.e., perse una

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.I.214-5.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, II.521-2.

Editorial notes

 Columella, De re rustica, VI.1.1. “agricolae contrarium pastoris propositum; cum ille quam maxime subacto et puro solo gaudeat, hic novali graminosoque”.

Glosses

Verbum, id est, verum, bonum.

Glosses

a.Eteroenergetica.

Glosses

b.Eteropathetica.

Glosses

c. Autoenergetica.

Glosses

d. Idiopathe.

Glosses

e. Autoenergeticon.

Glosses

f. Idiopathe.

Glosses

 Of potis and sum.

Glosses

 Of non and volo.

Glosses

 Of magis and volo.

Glosses

 It hath the passive only in composition, as efficior, etc., not facior, which is supplied by fio.

Glosses

Ordior, orsus, “to begin”. Operior, experior, comperior, reperior, pertus.

Glosses

 * Reduplication, or augment.

Glosses

aDimicatum. 

Glosses

 b Parsum.

Glosses

 c Dispescitum.

Glosses

 d Discitum.

Glosses

 e Compescitum.

Glosses

 f, Poscitum.

Glosses

 g, Listum.

Glosses

 h, Lutum.

Glosses

 Ovat.

Glosses

Deiero,

Glosses

 Peiero.

Glosses

 Inquam.

Glosses

 Memento.

Glosses

 Faxo.

Glosses

 Forem.

Glosses

 Quaeso.

Glosses

 Ausim.

Glosses

 Aio.

Glosses

 Salve.

Glosses

 Cedo.

Glosses

 Infit.

Glosses

 Odi.

Glosses

 Caepi.

Glosses

 Memini.

Glosses

 Novi.

Glosses

Anastrophe.

Editorial notes

 Tacitus, Historiae, III.32.

Editorial notes

 Pliny, Naturalis historiae, IX.167. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.216. “si{ve} ista uxor sive amicast”

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, XVI.7.2.

Editorial notes

 Both Latin expressions are often repeated in Terence’s Heauton Timorumenos.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Orationes in Catilinam, II.1.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Philippicae, II.15. “Tu cum principem senatorem, civem singularem tam propinquum habeas, ad eum de re publica nihil referas, referas ad eos qui suam rem nullam habent, tuam exhauriunt?”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.216. “memini, tam etsi nullu’ moneas”.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Quintum, III.8. Velit nolit, scire difficile est”.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, II.6.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, VIX, 21.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.251. “navibus (infandum!) amissis”.

Glosses

Epenthesis.

Glosses

Paragogie.

Glosses

Veteres saepe geminabant ss.

Glosses

Syncope.

Glosses

Apocope.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.263. quae m<eo> quomque animo lubitumst facere”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, III.3.531-2. “Thais maxumo te orabat opere”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, IV.7.789.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.254.

Glosses

Optumus. Volgus. Passes, Arbos, etc.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.188. mos gerundust Thaidi”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.328.

Editorial notes

 Juvenal, Saturae, II.3.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, XI.24.4. “Philotimus non modo nullus venit sed ne per litteras quidem aut per nuntium certiorem facit”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.216.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.198.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, VIII.251.

Editorial notes

 Boccaccio, De genealogiae deorum gentilium, XXV. “O michi sola mei super Astianactis ymago”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Phormio, I.162.

Editorial notes

 Pliny, Naturalis historiae, X.150.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, XIII.46, “Hostium plus quinque milia caesa”.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Ad familiares, VIII. “amplius dies quadraginta mansit”.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, XXIV.47.

Editorial notes

 Caesar, De bello gallico, II.7.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.6.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.3.312.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.618.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.94-5.

Editorial notes

 Caesar, De bello gallico, I.34.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, I.113.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.1.307. desiderio id fieri {tuo}”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Phormio, V.1016. “neglegentia tua neque odio id fecit tuo”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, VIII.4.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, III.5.599.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.35.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, XI.660.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, II.425. placitam Paci nutritor oliuam”.

Editorial notes

 Gellius, Noctes Atticae, II.2.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.36-7.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, III.1.396-7.

Glosses

Si, foran ter, estne intus, si sit, rogas: hellenismus. Nisi forsed. Terence, nescio, nisi, mihi deos satis scio fuisse iratos etc. Hellenismus.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, IX, 11.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De officiis, I.22.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.82.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, VI.46. “Pasiphaen niuei solatur amore iuuenci”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, VI.62-3.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, VI, 835.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, VII.46.

Editorial notes

Persius, Saturae, I.27.

Editorial notes

 Persius, Saturae, III.29. “censoremue tuum uel quod trabeate salutas?”.

Editorial notes

 Petronius, Satiricon, XCIV.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, XXV.2.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Sermones, I.5.41-2. “occurrunt, animae, qualis neque candidiores terra tulit”.

Editorial notes

Terece, Eunuchus, III.5.557.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.156. “ea primum ab illo animum advortenda iniuriast”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.225-6. “adeon homines inmutarier ex amore ut non cognoscas <eu>ndem esse!”.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, V.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.167-8.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.211. “ego quoque una pereo, quod mist carius”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, III.82.

Editorial notes

Thomae Linacri Britanni, De emendata strvctura latini sermonis libri sex. Emendatiores. Index copiosissimus in eosdem. Lutetiae. Ex Officina Roberti Stephani typographi Regij. MDL. p. 379.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Phormio, I.51. “Siquis me quaeret rufu'”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, II.132.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, V.1.4. “dices ‘quid quaeso istuc erat?’ Magnum”.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, VII.20.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, VII.36.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.62.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, III.1.410.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.24.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, III.3.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.599-600.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, XXXI.1.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Adelphoe, I.106-7. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.19.

Editorial notes

 Quintilian, Declamationes maiores, III.1.

Editorial notes

 Propertius, Elegiae, IV.11.

Editorial notes

Martial, Epigrammata, 14.181. Here Granger probably confused the two authors, both interested in the story of Hero and Leander.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, III.56.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.61.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, II.192.

Editorial notes

 The title of the section corresponds with the running head, thus it has been maintained.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Laelius de amicitia, 64. Cicero is probably quoting from Ennius’ Hecuba, a tragedy that is now lost.

Editorial notes

Allaeosis is a figure of speech and theological concept especially used by the Swiss theologian Huldrych Zwingli. “Zwingli names it an allaeosis when anything is ascribed to the divine nature of Christ, which, nevertheless, is a property of the human nature, and the reverse; For example, where it is said in Scripture, Luke 24:28, ‘Ought not Christ to have suffered these things, and to enter into His glory?’ there Zwingli triflingly declares that the term Christ, in this passage, refers to His human nature. Beware! beware! I say of that allaeosis; . . . for if I permit myself to be persuaded to believe that the human nature alone suffered for me, Christ will not be to me a Saviour of great worth, but He Himself stands in need of a Saviour.” Schmid, Heinrich FE. The doctrinal theology of the Evangelical Lutheran Church. Wipf and Stock Publishers, 2008, p. 348.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, V.

Glosses

* Magis aucte.

Glosses

Antiptosis.

Editorial notes

 Pliny, Naturalis historiae, book VII.XXX.117. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De divinatione, II.XLIII.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, I.1.

Glosses

Synthesis.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, VI.660.

Glosses

Syllepsis.

Glosses

Synthesis.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, Prologus, 32.

Editorial notes

Vulgata, John 12:24.

Glosses

Zeugma.

Glosses

Protozeugma. Mesozeugma. Hypozeugma

Editorial notes

 Persius, Saturae, I.27.

Glosses

 Pronoun, or noun indefinite.

Editorial notes

 Catullus, Carme XXII.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.457-8.

Glosses

Interrogatives and indefinites agree with the word following, as Caesar excellentibus ingeniis, quale tuum est, delectatur.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 5.

Editorial notes

 Caesar, De bello gallico, I.6.1.

Glosses

Antiptosis.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, Prologus, 3.

Editorial notes

Vulgata, John 12:24.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.1.57-8.

Editorial notes

 Latin proverb (Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.32).

Glosses

Syllepsis.

Glosses

Anacholuthus.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.331. “milia quot magnis umquam venere Mycenis”.

Editorial notes

 Catullus, Carme XXII.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Aulularia, I.2.105.

Glosses

Synthesis.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Adelphoe. “aperite aliquis actutum ostium”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, II.316-7. “furor iraque mentem praecipitat”.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, VIII.67.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, XI.82. “robora percussit, pectus quoque robora fiunt”.

Glosses

Syllepsis.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae Ad Familiares, XIV.5. Si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero valemus”.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, III.52.

Glosses

Prolepsis.

Glosses

Zeugma.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.16-7.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.135.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.1.225-6. deon homines inmutarier ex amore ut non cognoscas <eu>ndem esse!”.

Editorial notes

 Persius, Saturae, I.27.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Epistulae ex Ponto, II.47-8.

Glosses

Ubi.

Glosses

Unde.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.3.312. “si adeo digna res{es}t ubi tu nervos intendas tuos”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, Prologus, 10-1.

Glosses

Tam, quam.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, XV.XIX.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Orationes in Catilinam, I.5.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Laelius de amicitia, 45.

Glosses

Ut.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, VII.XVII.

Glosses

Tanto, quanto, multo, longe.

Editorial notes

 Catullus, Carme IL.

Glosses

 Of number.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De re publica, VI.12.

Glosses

Ut.

Glosses

Donec.

Glosses

Dum.

Glosses

Ut, τελιχιο͂ς.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, V.514.

Glosses

Quoad.

Glosses

Ne.

Glosses

Etsi, tametsi, etc.

Glosses

Ne, an, num.

Glosses

Etsi, tametsi, etc.

Glosses

 Quamvis.

Glosses

 Licet.

Glosses

 Cum.

Glosses

Ut.

Glosses

Ne, an, num.

Glosses

Mediate apposition.

Glosses

 Immediate apposition.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Aulularia, I.2.105.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, XIV.XIX. “me multa impediverunt”.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, II.42-3.

Glosses

Place.

Glosses

Place.

Glosses

Humi, domi, etc.

Glosses

 Virgil, Aeneidos, V.481.

Glosses

Measure.

Editorial notes

 Columella, Res rustica, 2.10.26. Perseus Archives.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, XI.15.2.

Editorial notes

 Varro, Rerum rusticarum de agri cultura, I.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, XVII.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, XVII.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, IX.12.1. “at quam honesta, at quam expedita tua consilia, quam evigilata tuis cogitationibus, qua itineris, qua navigationis, qua congressus sermonisque cum Caesare!”.

Editorial notes

 Justin, Historiarum Philippicarum, XXXVI.3.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Adelphoe, V.958. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.88.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Ars amatoriae, III.65.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Epidicus, IV.2.605.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Epidicus, IV.2.605.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Epidicus, IV.2.605.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.326.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De officiis, III.30.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, II.4.338.

Editorial notes

 Martial, Epigrams, IX.11.16.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, XIV.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Heroides, XIV.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.662.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.328.

Editorial notes

 Juvenal, Saturae, II.3.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Sermones, I.27.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Orationes in Verrem, II.1.61.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.51.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, I.1.61.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, II.17.

Editorial notes

 Plautus, Cistellaria, I.1.69.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Caio Maior de senectute, I.2. “Hoc enim onere, quod mihi commune tecum est”.

Editorial notes

 Arnobius, Adversus nationes liber II, 16.12. nos immunes malis ab his sumus”.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum, IV.16.3.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Epistulae, I.52.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Epistulae ad familiares, II.1.

Editorial notes

 Livy, Ab urbe condita, XXIII, 30. Multo sanguine ac volneribus ea Poenis victoria stetit”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.1.74.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, XI.358.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, V.3.994.

Glosses

Magis velim.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, I.96-7.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Heauton Timorumenos, IV.1.410-11. “invidere omnes mihi, mordere clanculum: ego non flocci pendere”.

Glosses

*Of eo.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.225-6. “adeon homines inmutarier ex amore”.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, IV.6.450.

Glosses

Greek construction.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Epistulae, I.16.20.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Adelphoe. III.491. Loeb Classical Library.

Editorial notes

 Pliny, Naturalis historiae, XI.111.265. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

 Pliny, Naturalis historiae, VIII.193.6. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Georgicon, III.419.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Odes, I.11.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, I.713.

Glosses

Prosody of letters and syllables in etymology. Four degrees of distinction in a period.

Glosses

 1. Distinction.

Glosses

 A comma “,”

Glosses

 2. Subdistinction

Glosses

 3. Imperfect colon “;” perfect colon “:”.

Glosses

 Parentheses “( )”.

Glosses

Perfecta distinctio.

Glosses

 A period “.

Glosses

 As also are the other sentences.

Glosses

 Interrogative point “?”.

Glosses

 Admirative point “!”.

Glosses

 Conjunctive “- ”.

Glosses

 Divisive “.”.

Glosses

 Apostrophus “’”

Editorial notes

Pliny, Naturalis historiae, VII.XXXVII.131.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, III.1.391.

Editorial notes

 Persius, Saturae, I.1.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Quintio, XV.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 56.

Glosses

 * For the most part.

Glosses

 * Most commonly.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, In Verrem, II.128.

Glosses

Zeugmatically.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Orationesin Catilinam, I.1.1.

Editorial notes

Vulgata, Ad Romanos, I.29-31. “repletos omni iniquitate, malitia, fornicatione, avaritia, nequitia, plenos invidia, homicidio, contentione, dolo, malignitate”. 

Glosses

Romanos I.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Plancio, XLII, 101.

Glosses

 By prolepsis. Proleptical clauses.

Glosses

 By asyndeton, i.e.the defect of the conjunction, called also dialysis.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Aeneidos, IV.594.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Rhetorica ad Herennium, IV. 28. Loeb Classics.

Editorial notes

 * Large sumpta.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De officiis, II.20.

Glosses

 * Relatum essentiae.

Glosses

 * Quantitatis, qualitatis, loci.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 1.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, De officiis, I.25.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 111.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.96.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, II.3.312.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.108-10.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, In Verrem, II.128.

Editorial notes

 Mantovano, Battista Mantova, Adulescentia, vv. 1.2.(Lee Piepho, 1989). Perseus Archive.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2,91-4.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 111.

Editorial notes

 William Lily, A Short Introduction of Grammar; Guilielmi Lilii ad suos Discipulos monita Paedagogica, Seu Carmen De Moribus, vv.1-2.

Editorial notes

 Common medieval and renaissance proverb meaning “so many heads, so many opinions” probably coming from Terence (Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.200).

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, II,88-9. “at tu, funesti ne sim tibi muneris auctor, nate, cave, dum resque sinit tua corrige vota!”.

Editorial notes

 The running head has been copied and modernized because of its correspondence to the title of the scheme included here by Granger.

Editorial notes

 Virgil, Eclogae, X.69.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Andria, III.607. Ubi illic{e}st scelu' qui perdidit me?”.

Glosses

The dependence of the nominative case.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Oratio pro Milone, XVI.43. “inlecebram esse peccandi impunitatis spem”.

Glosses

Depending all originally of the nominative.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.168.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, I.678-80. voce nova captus custos Iunonius ‘at tu, quisquis es, hoc poteras mecum considere saxo’ Argus ait;

Glosses

 * The epithet to the verb as the adjective is to the substantive. The dependents of the verb.

Editorial notes

 Horace, Epistles, I.18.69.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, III.577.

Glosses

 * And the dative of the person, before the dative of the thing.

Glosses

 * Depending all originally of the verb.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, III.339.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, III.324-5.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, II.119-21.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Quinctio, 1.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Roscio Amerino, 5.

Editorial notes

 Cicero, Pro Quinctio, 1.

Glosses

 * But construed before it, when his antecedent is expressed, as maiorem partem cuius officii refero etc.

Editorial notes

 Latin motto (Stone, Jon R. The Routledge dictionary of Latin quotations: the illiterati's guide to Latin maxims, mottoes, proverbs, and sayings. Routledge, 2013, p.32).

Glosses

Quarum laudum gloriam adamaris, etc., Cicero.

Editorial notes

 Terence, Eunuchus, I.2.139-41.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, II.68-9.

Editorial notes

 Ovid, Metamorphoses, II.25-6.

Glosses

 When many coniunctions come together.

Editorial notes

 Alexandri Nevylli Angli, De furoribus Norfolciensium Ketto Duce, Liber unus. Eiusdem Noruicus. Londini. Ex Officina Henrici Binnemani Typographi. Anno salutis humanae. 1575. [B. ij]

Editorial notes

 Alexandri Nevylli Angli, De furoribus Norfolciensium Ketto Duce, Liber unus. Eiusdem Noruicus. Londini. Ex Officina Henrici Binnemani Typographi. Anno salutis humanae. 1575. [B. ij]

Glosses

 1.Principal

Glosses

 2. Principal

Editorial notes

The Queenes Maiesties Letters to the great Sophy of Persia, sent by M. Anthonie Ienkinson. 1561. In: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation edited by Richard Hakluyt and Edmund Goldsmid. Volume III. Here in the example, Granger changes the name of Anthony Jenkinson (1529 - 1610/1611), English merchant and famous navigator, into that of Alexander.

Glosses

 1.Principal

Glosses

 2. Principal

Glosses

 3. Principal

Editorial notes

 Granger refers here to the story of Tiresias as told in Ovid’s Metamorphoses, III.316-355.

Glosses

 1.Principal

Glosses

 2. Principal

Glosses

 3. Principal

Glosses

 4. Principal

Glosses

 5. Principal

Editorial notes

 The word “first” is a mistake for “fifth”.

Glosses

 After an hundred, the greater number is set before howsoever.

Editorial notes

To John Leventhorpe, most honourable man, friend of upright and literate men, and my truly benign patron, knight adorned with gold, I wish perpetual happiness.

O magnanimous and most dignified man, you suddenly presented me with this gift, you to whom, even after pondering on it, I would still offer the first fruits of my fertile field with a sincere heart and not with flattering hands.

First, since you are not only of unique genius but also very well-educated (although you modestly say that you are not wise, but a friend of philosophers, which I have always held to be true excellence and nobility), you are likewise of a mind both benevolent and favourable to all men of letters and especially to those who do not jealously keep to themselves what the keen muse bestows on them but hare it in imitation of the gods.

Secondly, the behaviour of my work requires that I receive your benefits – often bestowed on me who do not deserve them – as a simple man would do, so that I may show you some proof of my grateful spirit. Furthermore, for I already foresee how safe to be under the auspices of your patronage may be for me.

And I hope that this clear sign of your protection will be received as a token very amicably, especially by any devotee of the sacred Minerva.

And with this decision, which is not at all premature, I give you and dedicate to you very deservedly and very willingly this undoubtedly small gift, born of the modest abundance of small wit, praying with all my strength that you will welcome it with a favourable and benign spirit, in the same way that it is proposed by me to your very considerate soul:

In this matter I hope you will imitate Artaxerxes, King of the Persians, who, when a poor man named Sinaeta had offered him with both hands water taken from the river Cyro (everyone was compelled by law to bring, by offering them, gifts, that is gifts according to their possibilities before the king who was advancing on horseback), said: “I accept your gift with a thankful spirit and count it among the most precious ones above the Eunuchs under my command”. Just as they collected water from their hands in a golden phial so if you, most renowned man, according to your supreme humanity and your pure candour, made yourself worthy to receive any gift not in a golden phial but in the small earthen urn of your acceptance, you would make me capable of any promise.

Be well, most generous man, may most excellent and Almighty God protect and preserve you forever.

Calends of June 1615.

Thomas Granger, servant most consecrated to thy dignity

Editorial notes

A translation of the letter follows:

"To John Leventhorpe, most honourable man, friend of upright and literate men, and my truly benign patron, knight adorned with gold, I wish perpetual happiness.

O magnanimous and most dignified man, you suddenly presented me with this gift, you to whom, even after pondering on it, I would still offer the first fruits of my fertile field with a sincere heart and not with flattering hands.

First, since you are not only of unique genius but also very well-educated (although you modestly say that you are not wise, but a friend of philosophers, which I have always held to be true excellence and nobility), you are likewise of a mind both benevolent and favourable to all men of letters and especially to those who do not jealously keep to themselves what the keen muse bestows on them but hare it in imitation of the gods.

Secondly, the behaviour of my work requires that I receive your benefits – often bestowed on me who do not deserve them – as a simple man would do, so that I may show you some proof of my grateful spirit. Furthermore, for I already foresee how safe to be under the auspices of your patronage may be for me.

And I hope that this clear sign of your protection will be received as a token very amicably, especially by any devotee of the sacred Minerva.

And with this decision, which is not at all premature, I give you and dedicate to you very deservedly and very willingly this undoubtedly small gift, born of the modest abundance of small wit, praying with all my strength that you will welcome it with a favourable and benign spirit, in the same way that it is proposed by me to your very considerate soul:

In this matter I hope you will imitate Artaxerxes, King of the Persians, who, when a poor man named Sinaeta had offered him with both hands water taken from the river Cyro (everyone was compelled by law to bring, by offering them, gifts, that is gifts according to their possibilities before the king who was advancing on horseback), said: “I accept your gift with a thankful spirit and count it among the most precious ones above the Eunuchs under my command”. Just as they collected water from their hands in a golden phial so if you, most renowned man, according to your supreme humanity and your pure candour, made yourself worthy to receive any gift not in a golden phial but in the small earthen urn of your acceptance, you would make me capable of any promise.

Be well, most generous man, may most excellent and Almighty God protect and preserve you forever.

Calends of June 1615.

Thomas Granger, servant most consecrated to thy dignity"

ToC